5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S®THU9/TMU9 Transmitter System Operating Manual
(E9é:2)
2109.9110.02 ─ 04
For information only! This manual, dated June 19, 2013, reflects the technical status as of that date. There may have been technical changes since that time. g n i t s a c d a o r B
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
l a u n a M g n i t a r e p O
1/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
© 2013 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0 Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164 E-mail:
[email protected] Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding. R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG. Trade names are trademarks of the owners. The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S ®XYZ1234 is abbreviated as R&S XYZ1234.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Quality management and environmental management
Certifed Quality System
ISO 9001 Certifed Environmental System
ISO 14001
Sehr geehrter Kunde, Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines Rohde & Schwarz Produktes entschieden. Sie erhalten
Dear customer, You have decided to buy a Rohde & Schwarz product. This product has been manufactured
Cher client, Vous avez choisi d’acheter un produit Rohde & Schwarz. Vous disposez donc d’un produit
damit ein nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt. Es wurde nach den Regeln unserer Qualitäts- und Umweltmanagementsysteme entwickelt, gefertigt und geprüft. Rohde & Schwarz ist unter anderem nach den Managementsystemen ISO 9001 und ISO 14001 zertifiziert.
using the most advanced methods. It was developed, manufactured and tested in compliance with our quality management and environmental management systems. Rohde & Schwarz has been certified, for example, according to the ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 management systems.
Der Umwelt verpflichtet
Environmental commitment
fabriqué d’après les méthodes les plus avancées. Le développement, la fabrication et les tests de ce produit ont été effectués selon nos systèmes de management de qualité et de management environnemental. La société Rohde & Schwarz a été homologuée, entre autres, conformément aux systèmes de management ISO 9001 et ISO 14001.
Energie-efziente, RoHS-konforme Produkte ❙ Kontinuierliche Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger Umweltkonzepte ❙ ISO 14001-zertiziertes Umweltmanagementsystem
❙
❙
Energy-efcient products Continuous improvement in environmental sustainability ❙ ISO 14001-certied environmental management system ❙
Engagement écologique ❙ Produits à efcience énergétique ❙ Amélioration continue de la durabilité environnementale ❙ Système de management environnemental certié selon ISO 14001
1 0 . 5 0 V 1 1 . 0 0 2 0 . 1 7 1 1
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
3/168
1 1 0 0 2 0 1 7 1 1
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
4/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Customer Support Technical support – where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz equipment.
Up-to-date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish. We will take care that you will get the right information.
Europe, Africa, Middle East
Phone +49 89 4129 12345
[email protected]
North America
Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)
[email protected]
Latin America
Phone +1-410-910-7988
[email protected]
Asia/Pacific
Phone +65 65 13 04 88
[email protected]
China
Phone +86-800-810-8228 / +86-400-650-5896
[email protected]
1171.0200.22-06.00 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
5/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
6/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Contents
Contents 1
Information about this Manual..............................................................7
2
Safety Instructions.................................................................................9
2.1
Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equipment..................................9
2.2
General Safety Instructions.......................................................................................10
2.2.1
Safety Instructions.........................................................................................................10
2.3
Special Hazard Information........................................................................................17
2.3.1
Hazards from AC Supply Voltage.................................................................................17
2.3.1.1
AC Power Supply..........................................................................................................17
2.3.1.2
Changing Fuses............................................................................................................17
2.3.2
Hazards from High‑Energy Electr ic Circuits..................................................................17
2.3.3
Hazards from RF Radiation...........................................................................................18
2.3.3.1
Obligation to Instruct Personnel....................................................................................18
2.3.3.2
RF Shielding..................................................................................................................18
2.3.3.3
Rules When Operating an Amplifier..............................................................................18
2.3.3.4
Rules When Working on an Open Amplifier..................................................................19
2.3.4
Conditions for Assembly Work on Cooling System.......................................................19
2.3.5
Safety Data Sheets for Hazardous Substances............................................................20
3
Operation..............................................................................................21
3.1
Operation using the TDU900......................................................................................21
3.1.1
Opening the Display......................................................................................................21
3.1.2
Closing the Display.......................................................................................................21
3.1.3
Using the Touchscreen Function..................................................................................21
3.2
Operation via a Web Browser....................................................................................22
3.2.1
Network Connection Process and Login.......................................................................22
3.3
Design of the User Interface......................................................................................23
3.3.1
Elements of the User Interface......................................................................................23
3.3.2
Views.............................................................................................................................23
3.3.3
Basic Menu Bar Functions............................................................................................24
3.3.3.1
Logbook........................................................................................................................25
3.3.3.2
Help...............................................................................................................................25
3.3.3.3
Local/Remote................................................................................................................25
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
3
7/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Contents
3.3.3.4
Login/Logout.................................................................................................................25
3.3.3.5
Device View..................................................................................................................25
3.3.3.6 3.3.4
Task View......................................................................................................................26 Navigation.....................................................................................................................26
3.3.5
Input fields.....................................................................................................................26
3.3.6
Editors...........................................................................................................................26
3.3.6.1
Numeric editor...............................................................................................................27
3.3.6.2
Text editor.....................................................................................................................27
3.3.7
Special tasks.................................................................................................................27
3.3.7.1
Finding an Error............................................................................................................27
3.3.7.2
Managing Users............................................................................................................28
3.3.8
Logbook........................................................................................................................28
3.3.8.1
Chronological View.......................................................................................................28
3.3.8.2
Filter (filter/options).......................................................................................................31
3.3.8.3
Scroll function................................................................................................................31
4
Device View Description......................................................................33
4.1
System Overview........................................................................................................33
4.1.1
Device View Home........................................................................................................33
4.1.1.1
Forward Power..............................................................................................................33
4.1.1.2
Reflected Power............................................................................................................34
4.1.1.3
Transmitter....................................................................................................................34
4.1.1.4
N+1 Redundancy..........................................................................................................35
4.2
Transmitter..................................................................................................................37
4.2.1
Automatic Switchover Functions...................................................................................37
4.2.1.1
Automatic Input Signal Switchover................................................................................37
4.2.1.2
Automatic Exciter Switchover........................................................................................40
4.2.2
Transmitter Status.........................................................................................................41
4.2.3
Amplifiers......................................................................................................................42
4.2.4
Rack..............................................................................................................................51
4.2.4.1
Status Parameters – Rack............................................................................................51
4.2.5
Output Stage.................................................................................................................51
4.2.5.1
Startup Parameters – Output Stage..............................................................................51
4.3
Exciter..........................................................................................................................52
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
4
8/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Contents
4.3.1
Coders (Standards).......................................................................................................52
4.3.1.1
DVB‑T2..........................................................................................................................52
4.3.1.2 4.3.1.3
DVB-T...........................................................................................................................60 ISDB-T..........................................................................................................................63
4.3.1.4
ATSC.............................................................................................................................68
4.3.1.5
DAB...............................................................................................................................70
4.3.1.6
ATV...............................................................................................................................72
4.3.2
Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power............................................................81
4.3.3
Signal Feed...................................................................................................................81
4.3.3.1
Configuring Physical Inputs...........................................................................................82
4.3.3.2
Input Signal Switchover.................................................................................................85
4.3.4
Controlling Time of Transmission in Single-Frequency Networks (SFN)......................88
4.3.4.1
Settings.........................................................................................................................91
4.3.5
Using Frequency Control..............................................................................................93
4.3.6
Precorrection.................................................................................................................96
4.4
Cooling.......................................................................................................................101
4.4.1
Configuring Switching Thresholds (Pressure) and Flow Volumes..............................101
4.4.2
Configuring Pumps and Fans......................................................................................104
4.4.3
Status of Cooling System............................................................................................105
5
Task View Description.......................................................................107
5.1
Basic Settings...........................................................................................................107
5.2
Parameters: Input Configuration.............................................................................115
5.3
System Control..........................................................................................................117
5.3.1
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).........................................................117
5.3.1.1
General.......................................................................................................................117
5.3.1.2
Settings on Transmitter Side.......................................................................................117
5.3.1.3
Settings on Manager Side...........................................................................................118
5.3.1.4
Which MIBs Must be Used?........................................................................................120
5.3.1.5
Which OIDs from a MIB Must be Used?.....................................................................121
5.3.1.6
Setting Alarms.............................................................................................................122
5.3.1.7
Testing the SNMP Communication.............................................................................123
5.3.1.8
Setting Alarms Using SNMP.......................................................................................124
5.3.1.9
Type plates - the ENTITY MIB....................................................................................126
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
5
9/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Contents
5.4
Maintenance..............................................................................................................128
5.4.1
Backup / Restore.........................................................................................................128
5.4.2 5.4.3
Software Update.........................................................................................................129 Maintenance................................................................................................................130
5.4.4
Options........................................................................................................................130
6
Operating the Device Manager.........................................................133
6.1
Basic Settings...........................................................................................................133
7
User Administration...........................................................................143
7.1
Creating New User Profiles......................................................................................143
7.2 7.3
Modifying User Profiles (Users and Access Rights).............................................143 Deleting User Profiles...............................................................................................144
7.4
Closing Active Sessions..........................................................................................144
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
6
10/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Information about this Manual
1 Information about this Manual This manual is part The of the documentation THU9 transmitter from Rohde & Schwarz. individual manualsfor forthe theR&S transmitter family havefamily a modular structure and complement each other. Structure The system manual, which is the central and overarching part of the overall documentation, describes all the steps involved in installing a transmitter. Operation of the transmitter system after installation and the steps required to put the system into operation are described in the operating manual. The service manual describes all maintenance, troubleshooting and service tasks that customers can carry out appropriate themselves.operating At certainmanual points in transmitter manual, the reader is referred to the or the service manual. Contents The manuals for the transmitter family describe all activities required for installation, startup, operation, maintenance, troubleshooting and servicing of the transmitter and its component parts. The appendix contains the interface descriptions and the technical documentation. Safety All skilled personnel working with a transmitter or its components have a duty to read the associated manuals and to follow the safety measures described in the section "Safety" and given at appropriate points in the manual. It must be ensured that the transmitter and the individual components of the transmitter are used only for their intended use. All activities connected with the transmitter or individual transmitter components must be carried out by skilled personnel. If activities require additional skills and qualifications, this is indicated at the appropriate points in the manual. Symbols and notation The "warning triangle" symbol refers the reader to potential hazards. The degree of danger is indicated by different signal words next to the warning symbol. Instructions areand given numbered steps. All other formatting options are intended to ‑explanatory. improve clarity areinself
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
7
11/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Information about this Manual
8
12/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equipment
2 Safety Instructions 2.1 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equipment
Compliance with safety regulations The safety regulations specified in this manual must always be complied with. The following points require special attention: ●
Only qualified technicians are allowed to install and wire the electrical equipment.
●
National and international safety rules and regulations must be observed when equipping operating facilities and during the assembly and operation of electrical systems. These include, for example: – Protective measures to prevent accidents –
Protection against overvoltage
–
Isolation of electrical systems
– –
Grounding of electrical systems Physical properties and laying of electrical lines and cables
–
Regulations that apply to factories, work areas and special systems
● When installing transmitter racks, it is important to observe national accident prevention regulations, for example, with regard to: – Crushing hazard when working beneath suspended loads
–
Fall hazards when working on ladders
–
Risk of injury when lifting heavy loads
●
Personal protective equipment (PPE) must be used when installation or repair work is being carried out. Depending on the type of work, it may be necessary to wear protective clothing such as hard hats, safety gloves, eye protection, etc.
●
Instruments and systems must not be operated unless their cabinets are closed. Observe the appropriate safety instructions when opening cabinets for maintenance or repair work.
●
Isolate all poles when disconnecting instruments and systems from the AC supply. In addition, disconnect all external sources of power, i.e. all measuring cables, extension cables and multipoint connectors (except for special service connectors). Then wait approx. 5 minutes to ensure that the capacitors in the system are sufficiently discharged.
● Additional information on liquid‑cooled transmitters: When installing the cooling system and filling it with coolant (pump and heat exchanger), the applicable regulations
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
9
13/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
General Safety Instructions
on working with hazardous products (coolant) must be observed; see the section "Material Safety Data Sheets" under "EC Safety Data Sheet – Antifrogen".
2.2 General Safety Instructions This section contains general safety instructions applying to all products manufactured or sold by Rohde & Schwarz. In accordance with IEC215 or EN60215, transmitter systems and their add-on equipment must be operated under the responsibility of qualified technicians only. The minimum requirements for qualified electricians are also defined in the standard "Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment". Compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements is a precondition for operating radio equipment and systems. The operator or the operator's authorized representative is responsible for ensuring compliance with these requirements. They must additionally ensure that the training of the operating personnel satisfies the country-specific requirements. This includes any periodic training that is necessary.
2.2.1
Safety Instructions It is essential to read and observe the following instructions and safety information. All factories and sites of the Rohde & Schwarz company group continuously strive to ensure that our products meet the very latest safety standards and that our customers are provided with the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and any additional equipment that they require are manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable safety regulations. Our quality assurance department regularly checks if these standards are met. This product has been manufactured and tested in accordance with the enclosed EC Certificate of Conformity and left the factory in a condition fully complying with the relevant safety standards. In order to keep the product in this condition and to ensure that it operates safely, the user must observe all information, warnings and instructions. Please do not hesitate to contact the Rohde & Schwarz company group if you have any queries regarding these safety instructions. Additionally, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the product is operated in the appropriate manner. The product is intended for industrial and laboratory use only and, if expressly authorized, also for use in the field, and must never be used in such a way that may result in injury to personnel or damage to property. The user shall be held responsible if the product is used for purposes other than those specified or in such a way that disregards the instructions from the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any consequences resulting from the product being used for purposes other than those for which it is intended. Use of the product for its intended purpose is assumed if the product is used in accordance with the specifications given in the associated product documentation and within its performance limits (see the data sheet, documentation and the following safety instruc-
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
10
14/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Safety Instructions General Safety Instructions
tions). Use of the product requires specialist knowledge and, in part, knowledge of the English language. It is therefore important to ensure that the product is operated only by specialist personnel and persons with the appropriate skills who have received detailed instruction in howoftoRohde operate product. If personnel equipment is required for the operation & the Schwarz products, this is protective indicated at the appropriate point in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions and product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to subsequent users of the product. Observance of the safety instructions is intended to prevent injury or damage resulting from hazards of all types. It is therefore necessary that intended users carefully read and understand the following safety instructions before and during use of the product. It is also essential to observe all other safety instructions (e.g. relating to personnel protection) which are given at appropriate points in the product documentation. In these safety instructions, the term "product" refers to all articles sold and marketed by the Rohde & Schwarz company group; these include instruments, installations and all accessory items. Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation to warn of risks and hazards.
indicates an immediate high-risk hazard which will result in death or serious injury if it is not avoided.
indicates a potential medium-risk hazard which can result in death or (serious) injury if it is not avoided.
indicates a low-risk hazard which could result in minor or medium injury if it is not avoided.
indicates possible incorrect operation which could result in damage to the product. These signal words correspond to the definitions customary in the European Economic Area for civil applications. In addition to this definition, there may also be varying definitions used in other economic areas or for military applications. It is therefore important to note that the signal words described here are used only in connection with the associated product documentation and the associated product. The use of signal words in connection
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
11
15/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
General Safety Instructions
with non-associated products or non-associated documentation can lead to incorrect interpretation and thus result in injury and damage.
Operating conditions, positions and locations The product should only be operated in the operating conditions, positions and locations specified by the manufacturer such that ventilation is not obstructed. Non-observance of the manufacturer specifications can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury. All work must be performed in compliance with the local or country-specific safety and accident prevention regulations. 1. Unless otherwise agreed, the following points apply for Rohde & Schwarz products: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i)
Operating position: housing base at bottom IP degree of protection: 2X Degree of soiling: 2 Overvoltage category: 2 For indoor use only Operation up to 2000 m above sea level Transport up to 4500 m above sea level Tolerance for nominal voltage: ± 10 % Tolerance for nominal frequency: ± 5 %
2. Do not stand the product on surfaces, vehicles, shelves or tables that are not suitable for weight or stability reasons. When mounting and securing the product on/to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves), always follow the installation instructions from the manufacturer. Persons can be injured or even killed if installation is not performed in the way described in the product documentation. 3. Do not place the product on appliances that generate heat (e.g. radiators and fan heaters). The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet. Overheating of the product can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury. Electrical safety Non-observance or inadequate observance of the instructions concerning electrical safety can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury. 1. Before switching on the product, always make sure that the nominal voltage set at the product matches the nominal AC voltage of power supply network. If it is necessary to change the voltage setting, it may also be necessary to change the associated AC supply fuse of the product. 2. In the case of products of protection class I with movable power supply line and plug connector, operation is only permitted at sockets with protective contact and connected PE conductor.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
12
16/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
General Safety Instructions
3. Any deliberate interruption of the PE conductor (both along the feed line and at the product itself) is not permitted. This can result in a potential shock hazard at the product. If extension cables or multipoint connectors are used, it must be ensured that their safety is checked at regular intervals. 4. If the product is not equipped with a power switch to disconnect it from the power supply, the plug on the connecting cable must be used to disconnect the power supply. In such cases, it must be ensured that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times (length of connecting cable approx. 2 m). Function switches or electronic switches are not suitable for disconnecting the product from the power supply. If products without power switch are integrated in racks or systems, the disconnecting device must be provided at system level. 5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check at regular intervals that the power cable is in perfect condition. Take suitable precautions and use suitable cable installation methods to ensure that the power cable cannot be damaged and personnel cannot be injured (e.g. as a result of electric shock or tripping over cables). 6. Operation is only permitted in TN/TT supply networks which are fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher fuse ratings should only be used after consultation with the Rohde & Schwarz company group). 7. Do not insert the plug into dusty or dirty sockets. Insert the plug firmly and completely into the sockets provided. Disregard of these points can lead to sparks, fire and/or injury. 8. Do not overload the sockets, extension cables or multipoint connectors as this can cause fire or electric shocks. 9. In the case of measurements in electrical circuits with voltages Urms > 30 V, appropriate measures must be taken to avoid all hazards (e.g. suitable measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation, etc.). 10. In the case of connections to IT equipment (e.g. PCs or industrial computers), it must be ensured that such connections satisfy the applicable IEC60950 ‑1/EN60950 ‑1 or IEC61010 ‑1/EN61010 ‑1. 11. Unless explicitly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation. Electrical lines and components will otherwise be exposed, which can lead to injury, fire or damage to the product. 12. If the product is connected at a fixed location, the connection between the on‑site PE conductor connection and the instrument PE conductor must be set up before any other connections are made. Installation and connection should only be performed by an electrician. 13. In the case of permanently installed equipment without built‑in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective devices, the supply circuit must be fused in such a way that personnel who have access to the product, as well as the product itself, are adequately protected.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
13
17/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
General Safety Instructions
14. Every product must be protected against overvoltage (e.g. as a result of a lightning strike) by means of appropriate overvoltage protection. The operating personnel are otherwise at risk of electric shock. 15. Foreign objects must not be inserted into the openings of the housing. This can cause short circuits in the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injury. 16. Unless otherwise specified, products are not protected against the penetration of fluids; see also the section "Operating conditions, positions and locations", point 1. The instruments must therefore be protected against the penetration of fluids. If this point is disregarded, there is a risk of electric shock for the user or of damage to the product, which in turn can also endanger personnel. 17. Do not use the product under conditions in which condensation could occur (or may already have occurred) in or on the product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold environment into a warm environment. Water penetration increases the risk of electric shock. 18. Before cleaning the product, fully disconnect it from the power supply (e.g. power supply network or battery). Clean instruments using a soft, lint-free dust cloth. Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol, acetone or cellulose thinner. Operation 1. Use of the product requires special instruction and full concentration during use. It must be ensured that persons who operate the product are fit to do so from a physical, intellectual and mental viewpoint, otherwise there is a risk of injury or damage. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable personnel to use the product. 2. Before moving or transporting the product, read and observe the information in the section "Transport" on page 16. 3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, it is not possible to completely rule out the use of materials which cause allergies, i.e. "allergens" (e.g. nickel). If, when using Rohde & Schwarz products, allergic reactions occur (e.g. skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory problems), consult a doctor immediately in order to determine the cause and to prevent health problems. 4. Before mechanically and/or thermally processing or dismantling the product, it is essential to refer to the section "Disposal" on page 16, point 1. 5. Owing to the inherent functional design of certain products (e.g. RF radio systems), increased electromagnetic radiation may be produced. In order to protect unborn life, pregnant women must be protected by means of suitable measures. Electromagnetic radiation also poses a risk to persons with pacemakers. The employer/operator is obliged to assess and identify workplaces where there is a particular risk of exposure to radiation, and to take precautions to prevent potential hazards.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
14
18/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
General Safety Instructions
6. In the event of fire, toxic substances (gases, fluids, etc.) can be discharged from the product and damage the health of personnel. If a fire occurs, appropriate measures must therefore be taken (e.g. breathing masks and protective clothing). 7. If a laser product is integrated in an Rohde & Schwarz product (e.g. CD/DVD drive), no settings or functions other than those described in the product documentation should be used in order to prevent injury (e.g. from the laser beam). Repair and servicing 1. The product should be opened by authorized specialist personnel only. Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the supply voltage, otherwise there is a risk of electric shock. 2. Any adjustments, part replacements, maintenance or repairs should be carried out only by authorized Rohde & Schwarz electricians. If safety‑relevant parts (e.g. power switches, power transformers or fuses) are to be changed, they must always be replaced with original parts. A safety check must be performed after safety‑relevant parts have been replaced (visual inspection, PE conductor test, insulation resistance measurement, leaking current measurement, functional check). This ensures that the product remains safe to use. Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells Non-observance or inadequate observance of the instructions concerning electrical safety can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious or (under certain circumstances) fatal injury.Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolyte (e.g. lithium cells) must be handled in line with EN62133. 1. Cells must not be disassembled, opened or crushed. 2. Lithium batteries must not be exposed to high temperatures or fire. Do not store or place batteries in direct sunlight. Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean dirty terminals using a dry, clean cloth. 3. Cells and batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells and batteries must not be stored in a potentially hazardous manner in a box or drawer where they can short-circuit each other or can be short-circuited by other conductive materials. A cell or battery should only be taken out of its original packaging when it is to be used. 4. Keep cells and batteries out of the reach of children. If a cell or battery has been swallowed, seek medical assistance immediately. 5. Do not subject cells and batteries to severe mechanical jolts or impacts. 6. If a cell is leaking, do not allow the fluid to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If the fluid does come into contact with the skin or eyes, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical assistance. 7. There is a risk of explosion if cells or batteries containing alkaline electrolyte (e.g. lithium cells) are replaced or charged incorrectly. To ensure that the product remains
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
15
19/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
General Safety Instructions
safe to use, always replace cells or batteries with the appropriate R&S type (see the replacement parts list). 8. Cells or batteries must be recycled and must not be disposed of with residual waste. Rechargeable batteries or batteries containing lead, mercury or cadmium must be disposed of as special waste. Observe the country‑specific disposal and recycling regulations. Transport 1. The product can be extremely heavy. It must therefore be moved and transported carefully and, if necessary, using suitable lifting gear (e.g. lift truck) in order to prevent injuries to the back and other parts of the body. 2. Handles on the products are handling aids which are only intended for persons transporting the product. The handles are not to be used for securing the product to or on transport equipment (e.g. cranes, forklift trucks, carts, etc.). It is your responsibility to ensure that the products are attached securely to or on suitable transport or lifting equipment. Observe the safety regulations from the manufacturer of the used transport or lifting equipment in order prevent injury to personnel and damage to the product. 3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle in a safe and appropriate manner. The manufacturer shall not be liable for accidents or collisions. Never use the product in moving vehicle if there is a risk that this could distract the vehicle driver. Make sure that the product is adequately secured in order to prevent injury or further damage in the event of an accident. Disposal 1. If products or their components are processed mechanically and/or thermally beyond the scope of the operating conditions for which they were intended, hazardous materials (dust containing heavy metals such as lead, beryllium, nickel) can be released. The product should therefore be dismantled by specially trained personnel only. Incorrect dismantling can cause damage to health. The national regulations concerning disposal must be observed. 2. If, when handling the product, hazardous materials or operating fluids are encountered which must be disposed of separately (e.g. coolant or engine oils that have to be changed at regular intervals), the safety instructions from the manufacturer of these hazardous materials and operating fluids, and the applicable local disposal regulations must be observed. Also observe any additional relevant safety instructions in the product documentation. Incorrect disposal of hazardous materials or operating fluids can result in damage to health and the environment.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
16
20/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
Special Hazard Information
2.3 Special Hazard Information
2.3.1
Hazards from AC Supply Voltage All voltages of Urms > 30 V AC or U > 60 V DC must be regarded as constituting a shock hazard. When working with voltages that constitute a shock hazard, appropriate measures must be taken to prevent exposure to danger. Never work on live components. Work on live parts should only be performed in exceptional cases and only if special safety precautions are taken.
2.3.1.1
2.3.1.2
2.3.2
AC Power Supply ●
Before connecting the AC power supply, it is important to ensure that the power supply specifications given for the system or instruments match the nominal specifications for the local power supply network. The power supply circuit must be protected by means of fuses in order to prevent overloads and short circuits.
●
Miniature modules have neutral conductor fuses. As a result, the power supply may still be connected even after interruption of the circuit by a fuse.
Changing Fuses ●
Fuses which are accessible to the operator should only be changed after the instruments have been disconnected from the power supply. They must always be replaced with fuses that have the same electrical rating, tripping characteristics and breaking capacity.
●
Motor protection switches and automatic line fuses in those parts of a transmitter system that can be accessed by users must be tripped. If their response range is adjustable, the ex‑factory setting must not be altered. If settings are changed inadvertently, the correct values specified in this documentation must be set.
Hazards from High Energy Electric Circuits The instruments contain low-voltage circuits that can be fed from a voltage source with an extremely low impedance (e.g. amplifier operating voltage). These circuits carry dangerously high levels of energy. At Rohde & Schwarz, we treat these circuits in the same way as circuits with hazardous contact voltages. Normally, these circuits are protected by covers to prevent unintentional contact. The cover has a warning label. In practice it has been repeatedly shown that short circuits caused by small metallic tools result in severe burns. For safety reasons, any high‑energy electric circuits in areas of the equipment that can be accessed by users are concealed by protective covers. ●
Exercise the same amount of caution for measurements on low‑impedance voltages (e.g. for repair purposes) that you would when performing measurements on operating voltages which constitute a shock hazard. Wear suitable protective gear when necessary.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
17
21/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
Special Hazard Information
●
Before opening any equipment or removing a particular cover, turn off the power supply and wait 5 minutes to ensure that capacitors have discharged sufficiently.
●
Do not discharge capacitors by short‑circuiting them.
2.3.3
Hazards from RF Radiation
2.3.3.1
Obligation to Instruct Personnel ●
The operator must train all personnel in the operation of this transmitter or instrument in line with EN60215 and/or IEC215. It is essential that these regular training sessions emphasize the dangers related to high frequency that exist at the respective transmitter or instrument. Operating personnel are only authorized to adjust and operate the equipment after they have completed the respective training sessions and their participation has been documented.
High‑energy RF circuits inside the transmitter or instrument are routed via conventional removable RF connectors (e.g. type N). Depending on the output power, the output ports of the transmitter and instrument are equipped with screw-type or plug-in RF lines or ducts. If RF lines or modules carry high power, the connection point or the entire module is tagged with the general danger warning label (yellow triangle with a black exclamation mark).
2.3.3.2
RF Shielding Transmitters and instruments from Rohde & Schwarz are shielded so that even in the immediate vicinity there is no danger from RF radiation when all RF lines are connected. This applies to statutory provisions in Germany, i.e. the regulation concerning electromagnetic fields: Limits for electrical and magnetic field strengths of high ‑frequency installations are defined in the 26th ordinance of the German Federal Government's Emission Control Act of December 16, 1996 (26. BImSchV).
2.3.3.3
Rules When Operating an Amplifier Disconnecting RF lines that are in operation can result in arcs. These can cause burns and eye injuries. ●
Operation of the amplifier is only permitted if a main or dummy antenna is connected
●
Never disconnect RF lines when the amplifier is in operation
●
Never open the amplifier or modules when the amplifier is in operation
●
Never operate the amplifier if RF lines are exposed
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
18
22/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
Special Hazard Information
2.3.3.4
Rules When Working on an Open Amplifier Operation with RF power is not permitted if the instrument has been opened or covers have been removed.
2.3.4
Conditions for Assembly Work on Cooling System The operator has to ensure that all installation, inspection and assembly work is performed by authorized and qualified personnel who have read and understood the operating instructions. Work on the system may be performed only with the system at rest and de‑energized, i.e. with all electric power supplies disconnected and switched off. All operating and safety instructions must be observed when working on the cooling system. Non‑observance of the safety instructions can result in injury to personnel, damage to the equipment and forfeiture of all claims for damages. Applicable accident prevention regulations must be observed. Precautions to prevent hazards resulting from electrical energy must be taken. Relevant VDE and IEC/IEEE regulations as well as the regulations of local power companies must be observed. When performing installation and assembly work, use only the original parts supplied. Any modifications to the system require the prior agreement of the manufacturer. To ensure the safety of the system, it is important to use only original spare parts and accessories approved by the manufacturer. If parts other than the original ones are used or alterations are made to the system, all claims for damages against the manufacturer shall be forfeited. In such cases, the manufacturer shall not be liable for any consequential or indirect damage. Safe and reliable operation of the system can only be ensured if the system is used for the intended purpose and the operating instructions are observed. Limit values specified in the operating manual must never be exceeded. Elements or subassemblies of the pump unit may be heated by the coolant, especially after extended periods of use under unfavorable conditions. Depending on the coolant return temperature, direct contact with the elements and subassemblies of the pump unit (pipes, tubes, reservoirs, etc.) should therefore be avoided wherever possible. For safety reasons, the coolant should be allowed to cool down to between 5 °C and 30 °C before the system is drained. Inappropriate handling of the coolant may be harmful to your health. For this reason, wear waterproof gloves and safety goggles during all maintenance and service work involving direct contact with the coolant. If your eyes or skin have come into contact with coolant, use tap water to wash it out immediately and thoroughly. Consult a doctor if necessary. If you have swallowed coolant, consult a doctor immediately in all cases. The coolant may contain an antifreezing agent which contains glycol.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
19
23/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety Instructions
R&S THU9/TMU9
Special Hazard Information
2.3.5
Safety Data Sheets for Hazardous Substances This section contains the following safety data sheets in accordance with the directive 91/155/ EEC: ● EC safety data sheet for coolant (Antifrogen N/ water mixture) ●
WOLFRASYN ULAF grease
●
GLT heat sink compound
Note regarding coolant Owing to legal provisions and type‑approval regulations, transmitter systems may in some countries have a different coolant to Antifrogen N. Please contact your local Rohde & Schwarz representative for further information.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
20
24/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/EC Page
ANTIFROGEN N WATER-MIXTURE 39% Substance key: SXR089061 Version : 2 - 26 / EU
1
Revision Date: 24.03.2004 Date of printing : 03.03.2008
1. Identification of the substance/preparation and company Trade name ANTIFROGEN N WATER-MIXTURE 39% Use of the substance/preparation. Industry sector : Functional Fluids Type of use : Brine for refrigeration Identification of the company Clariant Produkte (Deutschland) GmbH 65926 Frankfurt am Main Telephone no. : +49 69 305 18000 Information about the substance/preparation Div. Functional Chemicals/PRODUCT SAFETY ++49(0)69-305-2092/15315/32251 Emergency telephone number : +49 69 305 6418
2. Composition/information on ingredients Chemical characterization Monoethylene glycol (1,2-ethane diol) and inhibitors in aqueous solution (39% active) Hazardous ingredients Ethanediol Concentration : CAS number : EINECS number : Hazard symbols R phrases Sodium nitrite Concentration : CAS number : EINECS number : Hazard symbols R phrases
39 % 107-21-1 203-473-3 Xn 22 < 0,15 % 7632-00-0 231-555-9 O T 8 25
N 50
3. Hazards identification Harmful if swallowed.
4. First aid measures General information Remove soiled or soaked clothing immediately After inhalation When inhaled remove to fresh air and seek medical aid.
2093.8451.72 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
1
E-1 25/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/EC Page
ANTIFROGEN N WATER-MIXTURE 39% Substance key: SXR089061 Version : 2 - 26 / EU
2
Revision Date: 24.03.2004 Date of printing : 03.03.2008
After contact with skin In case of contact with skin wash off immediately with plenty of water After contact with eyes In case of contact with eyes rinse thoroughly with plenty of water and seek medical advice After ingestion Summon a doctor immediately.
5. Fire-fighting measures
Suitable extinguishing media Product itself is non-combustible; Fire extinguishing method of surrounding areas must be discussed. Special hazards from the substance itself, its combustion products or from its vapours In case of fires, hazardous combustion gases are formed: Carbon monoxide (CO) Special protective equipment for firefighting Use self-contained breathing apparatus
6. Accidental release measures Personal precautions Ensure adequate ventilation. Wear suitable personal protective equipment. Environmental precautions Do not allow to enter drains or waterways Methods for cleaning up/taking up Pick up with absorbent material (eg sand, kieselgur, acid binder, universal binder, sawdust). Dispose of as prescribed
7. Handling and storage Advice on safe handling Open and handle container with care. Ensure adequate ventilation. Advice on protection against fire and explosion The product is not combustible Storage stability Storage time: > 24 months
8. Exposure controls/personal protection Ingredients with occupational exposure limits to be monitored
2093.8451.72 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2
E-1 26/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/EC Page
ANTIFROGEN N WATER-MIXTURE 39% Substance key: SXR089061 Version : 2 - 26 / EU
3
Revision Date: 24.03.2004 Date of printing : 03.03.2008
ETHYLENE GLYCOL CAS number : 107-21-1 EU. Indicative Exposure and Directives relating to the protection of risks related to work exposure to chemical, physical, and biological agents. EU Exposure Limit Values Data Revision : 07 2000 Time Weighted Average (TWA): Values: 52 mg/m3 20 ppm ETHYLENE GLYCOL CAS number : 107-21-1 EU. Indicative Exposure and Directives relating to the protection of risks related to work exposure to chemical, physical, and biological agents. EU Exposure Limit Values Data Revision : 07 2000 Skin designation: Can be absorbed through the skin. ETHYLENE GLYCOL CAS number : 107-21-1 EU. Indicative Exposure and Directives relating to the protection of risks related to work exposure to chemical, physical, and biological agents. EU Exposure Limit Values Data Revision : 07 2000 Short Term Exposure Limit (STEL): Values: 104 mg/m3 40 ppm General protective measures Do not inhale vapours Hygiene measures Keep away from foodstuffs and beverages. Respiratory protection :
Use respiratory protection in case of insufficient exhaust ventilation or prolonged exposure Full mask to standard DIN EN 136 Filter A (organic gases and vapours) to standard DIN EN 141 The use of filter apparatus presupposes that environment atmosphere contains at least 17% oxygen bythe volume, and does not exceed the maximum gas concentration, usually 0.5% by volume. Relevant guidelines to be considered include EN 136/141/143/371/372 as well as other national regulations.
Hand protection :
For long-term exposure: Butyl rubber gloves Minimum breakthrough time / gloves : 480 min Minimum thickness / gloves 0,7 mm For short-term exposure (splash protection): Nitrile rubber gloves. time / gloves : 30 min Minimum breakthrough Minimum thickness / gloves 0,4 mm
2093.8451.72 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
3
E-1 27/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/EC Page
ANTIFROGEN N WATER-MIXTURE 39% Substance key: SXR089061 Version : 2 - 26 / EU
4
Revision Date: 24.03.2004 Date of printing : 03.03.2008
These types of protective gloves are offered by various manufacturers. Please note the manufacturers´ detailed statements, especially about the minimum thickness and the minimum breakthrough time. Consider also the particular working conditions under which the gloves are being used. Eye protection :
safety glasses
9. Physical and chemical properties Form :
Liquid
Colour :
light yellow
Odour :
perceptible
Freezing point :
approx. -25 °C Method : ASTM D 1177
Boiling temperature :
approx. 106 °C ( 1.013 mbar) Method : ASTM D 1120
Flash point :
None
Ignition temperature :
None
Oxidizing properties :
Not applicable
Self-ignition temperature :
Not applicable
Lower explosion limit :
not determined
Upper explosion limit :
not determined
Evaporation rate :
not determined
Vapour pressure :
< 0,1 mbar (20 °C) Method : Calculated by Syracuse.
Density :
approx. 1,07 g/cm3 (20 °C) Method : DIN 51757
Bulk density :
Not applicable
Vapour density in relation to air :
not determined
Solubility in water :
(20 °C) miscible in all proportions
Soluble in ... :
fat not determined
pH value :
7,8 - 8,3 (20 °C) Method : DIN EN 1262
Octanol/water partition coefficient (log Pow) :
not determined
Viscosity (kinematic) :
approx. 3,1 mm2/s ( 20 °C) Method : DIN 51562
2093.8451.72
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
4
E-1
28/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/EC Page
ANTIFROGEN N WATER-MIXTURE 39% Substance key: SXR089061 Version : 2 - 26 / EU Combustion number :
5
Revision Date: 24.03.2004 Date of printing : 03.03.2008
Not applicable
10. Stability and reactivity Thermal decomposition :
> 200 °C Method : DSC Source : Analogy
Hazardous reactions Incompatible with oxidizing materials.
11. Toxicological information Acute oral toxicity :
LD50 4.000 mg/kg (rat) Source : IUCLID Information based on the main component.
Acute inhalation toxicity :
not determined
Acute dermal toxicity :
not determined
Irritant effect on skin :
non-irritant
Irritant effect on eyes : Sensitization :
slightly irritant not determined
Mutagenicity :
not determined
Remarks Vapours and mists cause irritation/burns to eyes and the respiratory tract There is a possibility of kidney damage Poisoning affects the central nervous system The data on toxicology refer to the active ingredient.
12. Ecological information Biodegradability :
90 % good degradability Method : Zahn-Wellens test
Fish toxicity :
LC50 1.500 mg/l (golden orfe)
Remarks If handled correctly it causes no disturbance in treatment plants. The ecological number information is based on the undiluted product.
13. Disposal considerations Product In accordance with local authority regulations, take to special waste incineration plant
2093.8451.72 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
5
E-1 29/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Safety data sheet in accordance with 2001/58/EC Page
ANTIFROGEN N WATER-MIXTURE 39% Substance key: SXR089061 Version : 2 - 26 / EU
6
Revision Date: 24.03.2004 Date of printing : 03.03.2008
14. Transport information ADR
not restricted
ADNR
not restricted
RID
not restricted
IATA
not restricted
IMDG
not restricted
15. Regulatory information Labelling in accordance with EC-Directives hazard warning labelling compulsory Classification according to the calculation procedure of the Dangerous Preparations Directive (1999/45/EC). Hazard symbols Xn
Harmful
Hazardous component(s) to be indicated on label Ethanediol R phrases 22 S phrases 26 28.2 37/39
Harmful if swallowed. In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice. After contact with skin, wash immediately with water and soap. Wear suitable gloves and eye/face protection.
16. Other information Text of the R-phrases which are allocated to the ingredients/components mentioned in section 2 of this Safety Data Sheet. 22 25 50 8
Harmful if swallowed. Toxic if swallowed. Very toxic to aquatic organisms. Contact with combustible material may cause fire.
The data are based on the current state of our knowledge, and are intended to describe the product with regard to the requirements of safety. The data should not be taken to imply any guarantee of a particular or general specification. It is the responsibility of the user of the product to ensure to his satisfaction that the product is suitable for the intended purpose and method of use. We do not accept responsibility for any harm caused by the use of this information. In all cases, our general conditions of sale apply.
2093.8451.72 http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
6
E-1 30/168
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
SAFETY DATA SHEET WOLFRASYN ULAF
Date of printing :
Date of issue 2011-09-16
2011-09-16.
SECTION 1: Identification of the substance/mixture and of the company/undertaking 1.1 Product identifier Product name Product code Product description
: WOLFRASYN ULAF : 003001 : Grease
1.2 Relevant identified uses of the substance or mixture and uses advised against Not applicable.
1.3 Details of the supplier of the safety data sheet KLÜBER LUBRICATION MÜNCHEN KG Geisenhausenerstrasse 7 D-81379 München e-mail address of person responsible for this SDS
Tel: Fax:+49 +49(0) (0)897876-0 897876-333 : Material Compliance Management E-Mail:
[email protected]
National contact 1.4 Emergency telephone number Supplier Emergency telephone : 0049 (0) 897876-700 (24hrs) number (with hours of operation)
SECTION 2: Hazards identification 2.1 Classification of the substance or mixture Product definition : Mixture Classification according to Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 [CLP/GHS] Skin Sens. 1, H317 Aquatic Chronic 3, H412 Ingredients of unknown : Percentage of the mixture consisting of ingredient(s) of unknown toxicity: 97.7% toxicity Ingredients of unknown : Percentage of the mixture consisting of ingredient(s) of unknown hazards to the aquatic environment: 97.7% ecotoxicity Classification according to Directive 1999/45/EC [DPD] The product is classified as dangerous according to Directive 1999/45/EC and its amendments. Classification : R43 R52/53 Human health hazards : May cause sensitisation by skin contact. Environmental hazards : Harmful to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment. See Section 16 for the full text of the R phrases or H statements declared above. See Section 11 for more detailed information on health effects and symptoms.
2.2 Label elements Hazard pictograms
:
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
31/168
-1-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 2: Hazards identification Signal word Hazard statements
: Warning : May cause an allergic skin reaction. Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
Precautionary statements Prevention Response Storage Disposal Hazardous ingredients Supplemental label elements
: Wear protective gloves. Avoid release to the environment. Avoid breathing vapour. : IF ON SKIN: Wash with plenty of soap and water. If skin irritation or rash occurs: : : : :
Get medical attention. Not applicable. Not applicable. N-1-naphthylaniline Not applicable.
Special packaging requirements Containers to be fitted : Not applicable. with child-resistant fastenings Tactile warning of danger : Not applicable. 2.3 Other hazards Other hazards which do not result in classification Additional warning phrases
: Not available. : Not available.
SECTION 3: Composition/information on ingredients Substance/mixture Description
: Mixture : polyalkylene glycol oil solid lubricant Classification
Product/ingredient name N-1-naphthylaniline
Identifiers EC: 201-983-0 CAS: 90-30-2
% 1-2.5
67/548/EEC
Type
Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 [CLP]
See Section 16 for
[1] Acute Tox. 4, H302 Skin Sens. 1, H317 STOT RE 2, H373o Aquatic Acute 1, H400 Aquatic Chronic 1, H410 See Section 16 for the
the full text of the Rphrases declared above.
full text of the H statements declared above.
Xn; R22 R43 N; R50/53
There are no additional ingredients present which, within the current knowledge of the supplier and in the concentrations applicable, are classified as hazardous to health or the environment and hence require reporting in this section. Type [1] Substance classified with a health or environmental hazard [2] Substance with a workplace exposure limit [3] Substance meets the criteria for PBT according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Annex XIII [4] Substance meets the criteria for vPvB according to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Annex XIII Occupational exposure limits, if available, are listed in Section 8.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
32/168
-2-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 4: First aid measures 4.1 Description of first aid measures Eye contact : Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Check for and remove any contact lenses. Continue to rinse for at least 10 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation occurs. Inhalation : Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing. If not breathing, if breathing is irregular or if respiratory arrest occurs, provide artificial respiration or oxygen by trained personnel. It may be dangerous to the person providing aid to give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation. Get medical attention if adverse health effects persist or are severe. If unconscious, place in recovery position and get medical attention immediately. Maintain an open airway. Loosen tight clothing such as a collar, tie, belt or waistband. In case of inhalation of decomposition products in a fire, symptoms may be delayed. The exposed person may need to be kept under medical surveillance for 48 hours. Skin contact
Ingestion
: Wash with plenty of soap and water. Remove contaminated clothing and shoes. Wash contaminated clothing thoroughly with water before removing it, or wear gloves. Continue to rinse for at least 10 minutes. Get medical attention. In the event of any complaints or symptoms, avoid further exposure. Wash clothing before reuse. Clean shoes thoroughly before reuse. : Wash out mouth with water. Remove dentures if any. Remove victim to fresh air and keep atand restthe in exposed a positionperson comfortable for breathing. If material hasofbeen swallowed is conscious, give small quantities water to drink. Stop if the exposed person feels sick as vomiting may be dangerous. Do not induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical personnel. If vomiting occurs, the head should be kept low so that vomit does not enter the lungs. Get medical attention if adverse health effects persist or are severe. Never give anything by mouth to an unconscious person. If unconscious, place in recovery position and get medical attention immediately. Maintain an open airway. Loosen tight clothing such as a collar, tie, belt or waistband.
Protection of first-aiders
: No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable training. It may be dangerous to the person providing aid to give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation. Wash contaminated clothing thoroughly with water before removing it, or wear gloves.
4.2 Most important symptoms and effects, both acute and delayed Potential acute health effects Eye contact : No known significant effects or critical hazards. Inhalation : Exposure to decomposition products may cause a health hazard. Serious effects may be delayed following exposure. Skin contact : May cause an allergic skin reaction. Ingestion : No known significant effects or critical hazards. Over-exposure signs/symptoms Eye contact : No specific data. Inhalation Skin contact Ingestion
: No specific data. : Adverse symptoms may include the following: irritation redness : No specific data.
4.3 Indication of any immediate medical attention and special treatment needed Notes to physician : In case of inhalation of decomposition products in a fire, symptoms may be delayed. The exposed person may need to be kept under medical surveillance for 48 hours. Specific treatments : No specific treatment.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
33/168
-3
-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
WOLFRASYN ULAF
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
SECTION 5: Firefighting measures 5.1 Extinguishing media Suitable extinguishing media
: Use an extinguishing agent suitable for the surrounding fire.
Unsuitable extinguishing media
: None known.
5.2 Special hazards arising from the substance or mixture Hazards from the substance or mixture
: In a fire or if heated, a pressure increase will occur and the container may burst. This material is harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects. Fire water contaminated with this material must be contained and prevented from being discharged to any waterway, sewer or drain.
Hazardous combustion products
: Decomposition products may include the following materials: carbon dioxide carbon monoxide nitrogen oxides
5.3 Advice for firefighters Special precautions for fire-fighters
: Promptly isolate the scene by removing all persons from the vicinity of the incident if there is a fire. No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable training.
Special protective equipment for fire-fighters
: Fire-fighters should wear appropriate protective equipment and self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) with a full face-piece operated in positive pressure mode. Clothing for fire-fighters (including helmets, protective boots and gloves) conforming to European standard EN 469 will provide a basic level of protection for chemical incidents.
SECTION 6: Accidental release measures 6.1 Personal precautions, protective equipment and emergency procedures For non-emergency personnel
: No action shall be taken involving any personal risk or without suitable training. Evacuate surrounding areas. Keep unnecessary and unprotected personnel from entering. Do not touch or walk through spilt material. Avoid breathing vapour or mist. Provide adequate ventilation. Wear appropriate respirator when ventilation is inadequate. Put on appropriate personal protective equipment.
For emergency responders : If specialised clothing is required to deal with the spillage, take note of any information in Section 8 on suitable and unsuitable materials. See also the information in "For non-emergency personnel". 6.2 Environmental precautions
: Avoid dispersal of spilt material and runoff and contact with soil, waterways, drains and sewers. Inform the relevant authorities if the product has caused environmental pollution (sewers, waterways, soil or air). Water polluting material. May be harmful to the environment if released in large quantities.
6.3 Methods and materials for containment and cleaning up Small spill
: Stop leak if without risk. Move containers from spill area. Dilute with water and mop up if water-soluble. Alternatively, or if water-insoluble, absorb with an inert dry material and place in an appropriate waste disposal container. Dispose of via a licensed waste disposal contractor.
Large spill
: Stop leak if without risk. Move containers from spill area. Approach the release from upwind. Prevent entry into sewers, water courses, basements or confined areas. Wash spillages into an effluent treatment plant or proceed as follows. Contain and collect spillage with non-combustible, absorbent material e.g. sand, earth, vermiculite or diatomaceous earth and place in container for disposal according to local regulations (see section 13). Dispose of via a licensed waste disposal contractor. Contaminated absorbent material may poseinformation the same hazard as the spilt product. Note: see section 1 for emergency contact and section 13 for waste disposal.
6.4 Reference to other sections
: See Section 1 for emergency contact information. See Section 8 for information on appropriate personal protective equipment. See Section 13 for additional waste treatment information.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
34/168
-4-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 7: Handling and storage The information in this section contains generic advice and guidance. The list of Identified Uses in Section 1 should be consulted for any available use-specific information provided in the Exposure Scenario(s).
7.1 Precautions for safe handling Protective measures : Put on appropriate personal protective equipment (see Section 8). Persons with a history of skin sensitization problems should not be employed in any process in which this product is used. Do not get in eyes or on skin or clothing. Do not ingest. Avoid breathing vapour or mist. Avoid release to the environment. Keep in the original container or an approved alternative made from a compatible material, kept tightly closed when not in use. Empty containers retain product residue and can be hazardous. Do not reuse container. Advice on general : Eating, drinking and smoking should be prohibited in areas where this material is handled, stored and processed. Workers should wash hands and face before occupational hygiene eating, drinking and smoking. Remove contaminated clothing and protective equipment before entering eating areas. See also Section 8 for additional information on hygiene measures. 7.2 Conditions for safe storage, including any incompatibilities
7.3 Specific end use(s) Recommendations Industrial sector specific solutions
: Store in accordance with local regulations. Store in original container protected from direct sunlight in a dry, cool and well-ventilated area, away from incompatible materials (see section 10) and food and drink. Keep container tightly closed and sealed until ready for use. Containers that have been opened must be carefully resealed and kept upright to prevent leakage. Do not store in unlabelled containers. Use appropriate containment to avoid environmental contamination.
: Not available. : Not available.
SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection The information in this section contains generic advice and guidance. The list of Identified Uses in Section 1 should be consulted for any available use-specific information provided in the Exposure Scenario(s). 8.1 Control parameters Occupational exposure limits No exposure limit value known.
Recommended monitoring : If this product contains ingredients with exposure limits, personal, workplace atmosphere or biological monitoring may be required to determine the effectiveness procedures of the ventilation or other control measures and/or the necessity to use respiratory protective equipment. Reference should be made to European Standard EN 689 for methods for the assessment of exposure by inhalation to chemical agents and national guidance documents for methods for the determination of hazardous substances. Derived effect levels No DELs available. Predicted effect concentrations No PECs available. 8.2 Exposure controls Appropriate engineering controls
: No special ventilation requirements. Good general ventilation should be sufficient to control worker exposure to airborne contaminants. If this product contains ingredients with exposure limits, use process enclosures, local exhaust ventilation or other engineering controls to keep worker exposure below any recommended or statutory limits. Individual protection measures
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
35/168
-5-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 8: Exposure controls/personal protection Hygiene measures
Eye/face protection
: Wash hands, forearms and face thoroughly after handling chemical products, before eating, smoking and using the lavatory and at the end of the working period. Appropriate techniques should be used to remove potentially contaminated clothing. Contaminated work clothing should not be allowed out of the workplace. Wash contaminated clothing before reusing. Ensure that eyewash stations and safety showers are close to the workstation location. : Safety eyewear complying with an approved standard should be used when a risk assessment indicates this is necessary to avoid exposure to liquid splashes, mists, gases or dusts.
Skin protection Hand protection Body protection Other skin protection
Respiratory protection
Environmental exposure controls
: Chemical-resistant, impervious gloves complying with an approved standard should be worn at all times when handling chemical products if a risk assessment indicates this is necessary. : Personal protective equipment for the body should be selected based on the task being performed and the risks involved and should be approved by a specialist before handling this product. : Appropriate footwear and any additional skin protection measures should be selected based on the task being performed and the risks involved and should be approved by a specialist before handling this product. a properly fitted, air-purifying or air-fed complying with an approved : Use standard if a risk assessment indicates this respirator is necessary. Respirator selection must be based on known or anticipated exposure levels, the hazards of the product and the safe working limits of the selected respirator. : Emissions from ventilation or work process equipment should be checked to ensure they comply with the requirements of environmental protection legislation. In some cases, fume scrubbers, filters or engineering modifications to the process equipment will be necessary to reduce emissions to acceptable levels.
SECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties 9.1 Information on basic physical and chemical properties Appearance Physical state Colour Odour pH Melting point/freezing point Initial boiling point and boiling range
: : : : : :
Flash point Flammability (solid, gas) Burning time
: Not applicable. : Not available. : Not applicable.
Burning rate Upper/lower flammability or explosive limits
: Not applicable. : Not available.
Vapour pressure Density Bulk Density
: Not available. : 1.3 g/cm3 [20°C] : Not available.
Solubility(ies) Partition coefficient: noctanol/water
: Insoluble in the following materials: cold water and hot water. : Not available.
Auto-ignition temperature
: Not available.
Decomposition temperature Viscosity Explosive properties
: Not available. : Not available. : Not available.
Oxidising properties
: Not available.
Paste. Black. Characteristic. Not available. Not available. Not available.
9.2 Other information http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
36/168
-6-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 9: Physical and chemical properties No additional information.
SECTION 10: Stability and reactivity 10.1 Reactivity
: No specific test data related to reactivity available for this product or its ingredients.
10.2 Chemical stability
: The product is stable.
10.3 Possibility of hazardous reactions
: Under normal conditions of storage and use, hazardous reactions will not occur.
10.4 Conditions to avoid
: No specific data.
10.5 Incompatible materials
: No specific data.
10.6 Hazardous decomposition products
: Under normal conditions of storage and use, hazardous decomposition products should not be produced.
SECTION 11: Toxicological information 11.1 Information on toxicological effects Acute toxicity
Product/ingredient name Result N-1-naphthylaniline LD50 Dermal LD50 Oral Conclusion/Summary Acute toxicity estimates
Species Rabbit Rat
Dose >5000 mg/kg 1625 mg/kg
Exposure -
: Not available. Route
ATE value
Oral
2894.5 mg/kg
Irritation/Corrosion Conclusion/Summary Sensitiser Conclusion/Summary Mutagenicity Conclusion/Summary Carcinogenicity Conclusion/Summary Reproductive toxicity
: Not available. : Not available. : Not available. : Not available.
Conclusion/Summary : Not available. Teratogenicity Conclusion/Summary : Not available. Specific target organ toxicity (single exposure) Not available. Specific target organ toxicity (repeated exposure) Product/ingredient name
Category
N-1-naphthylaniline
Category 2
Route of exposure Oral
Target organs Not determined
Aspiration hazard Not available. Information on the likely routes of exposure
: Not available.
Potential acute health effects http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
37/168
-7-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 11: Toxicological information Inhalation
: Exposure to decomposition products may cause a health hazard. Serious effects may be delayed following exposure. Ingestion : No known significant effects or critical hazards. Skin contact : May cause an allergic skin reaction. Eye contact : No known significant effects or critical hazards. Symptoms related to the physical, chemical and toxicological characteristics Inhalation Ingestion Skin contact
: No specific data. : No specific data. : Adverse symptoms may include the following: irritation redness Eye contact : No specific data. Delayed and immediate effects and also chronic effects from short and long term exposure Short term exposure Potential immediate : Not available. effects Potential delayed effects : Not available. Long term exposure Potential immediate effects
: Not available.
Potential delayed effects : Not available. Potential chronic health effects Not available. Conclusion/Summary General Carcinogenicity Mutagenicity Teratogenicity Developmental effects Fertility effects Other information
: Not available. : Once sensitized, a severe allergic reaction may occur when subsequently exposed to very low levels. : No known significant effects or critical hazards. : : : : :
No known significant effects or critical hazards. No known significant effects or critical hazards. No known significant effects or critical hazards. No known significant effects or critical hazards. Not available.
SECTION 12: Ecological information 12.1 Toxicity Product/ingredient name N-1-naphthylaniline
Conclusion/Summary
Result Acute EC50 0.32 mg/l
Species Daphnia
Exposure 48 hours
Acute LC50 0.44 mg/lmg/l Chronic NOEC 0.02
Fish - Oncorhynchus mykiss Daphnia - Daphnia Magna
96 21 hours days
: Not available.
12.2 Persistence and degradability Product/ingredient name N-1-naphthylaniline
Test OECD 301C
Conclusion/Summary
: Not available.
Product/ingredient name N-1-naphthylaniline
Aquatic half-life -
Result 0 % - Not readily - 28 days Photolysis -
Dose -
Inoculum Biodegradability Not readily
12.3 Bioaccumulative potential Not available.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
38/168
-8-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 12: Ecological information 12.4 Mobility in soil Soil/water partition coefficient (KOC)
: Not available.
Mobility
: Not available.
12.5 Results of PBT and vPvB assessment PBT : Not applicable. vPvB : Not applicable. 12.6 Other adverse effects
: No known significant effects or critical hazards.
SECTION 13: Disposal considerations The information in this section contains generic advice and guidance. The list of Identified Uses in Section 1 should be consulted for any available use-specific information provided in the Exposure Scenario(s).
13.1 Waste treatment methods Product Methods of disposal
: The generation of waste should be avoided or minimised wherever possible. Significant quantities of waste product residues should not be disposed of via the foul sewer but processed in a suitable effluent treatment plant. Dispose of surplus and non-recyclable products via a licensed waste disposal contractor. Disposal of this product, solutions and any by-products should at all times comply with the requirements of environmental protection and waste disposal legislation and any regional local authority requirements.
Hazardous waste Packaging Methods of disposal
: The classification of the product may meet the criteria for a hazardous waste.
Special precautions
: This material and its container must be disposed of in a safe way. Care should be taken when handling emptied containers that have not been cleaned or rinsed out. Empty containers or liners may retain some product residues. Avoid dispersal of spilt material and runoff and contact with soil, waterways, drains and sewers.
: The generation of waste should be avoided or minimised wherever possible. Waste packaging should be recycled. Incineration or landfill should only be considered when recycling is not feasible.
SECTION 14: Transport information ADR/RID
IMDG
IATA
14.1 UN number
Not regulated.
Not regulated.
Not regulated.
14.2 UN proper shipping name
-
-
-
14.3 Transport hazard class(es)
-
-
-
14.4 Packing group
-
-
-
14.5 Environmental hazards
No.
No.
No.
14.6 Special precautions for user
Not available.
Not available.
Not available.
Additional information
-
-
-
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
39/168
-9-
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 14: Transport information 14.7 Transport in bulk according to Annex II of MARPOL 73/78 and the IBC Code
: Not available.
SECTION 15: Regulatory information 15.1 Safety, health and environmental regulations/legislation specific for the substance or mixture EU Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH) Annex XIV - List of substances subject to authorisation Substances of very high concern None of the components are listed. Annex XVII - Restrictions : Not applicable. on the manufacture, placing on the market and use of certain dangerous substances, mixtures and articles Other EU regulations Europe inventory Black List Chemicals Priority List Chemicals Integrated pollution prevention and control list (IPPC) - Air Integrated pollution prevention and control list (IPPC) - Water
: : : :
All components are listed or exempted. Not listed Not listed Not listed
: Not listed
International regulations Chemical Weapons Convention List Schedule I Chemicals
: Not listed
Chemical Weapons Convention List Schedule II Chemicals
: Not listed
Chemical Weapons Convention List Schedule III Chemicals
: Not listed
15.2 Chemical Safety Assessment
: This product contains substances for which Chemical Safety Assessments are still required.
SECTION 16: Other information Indicates information that has changed from previously issued version. Abbreviations and : ATE = Acute Toxicity Estimate CLP = Classification, Labelling and Packaging Regulation [Regulation (EC) No. acronyms 1272/2008] DNEL = Derived No Effect Level EUH statement = CLP-specific Hazard statement PNEC = Predicted No Effect Concentration RRN = REACH Registration Number
Procedure used to derive the classification according to Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 [CLP/GHS] Classification Skin Sens. 1, H317 Aquatic Chronic 3, H412
Calculation method Calculation method
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
Justification
40/168
- 10 -
E-2
Conforms to Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006 (REACH), Annex II - United Kingdom (UK) 5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
WOLFRASYN ULAF
SECTION 16: Other information Full text of abbreviated H statements
: H302 H317 H373o H400 H410 H412
Full text of classifications [CLP/GHS]
Full text of abbreviated R phrases
Full text of classifications [DSD/DPD] Version Date of printing Date of issue Date of previous issue Prepared by
Harmful if swallowed. May cause an allergic skin reaction. May cause damage to organs through prolonged or repeated exposure if swallowed. Very toxic to aquatic life. Very toxic to aquatic life with long lasting effects. Harmful to aquatic life with long lasting effects.
4, H302 : Acute AquaticTox. Acute 1, H400 Aquatic Chronic 1, H410 Aquatic Chronic 3, H412 Skin Sens. 1, H317 STOT RE 2, H373o
ACUTE TOXICITY: - Category 4 1 AQUATIC TOXICITYORAL (ACUTE) - Category AQUATIC TOXICITY (CHRONIC) - Category 1 AQUATIC TOXICITY (CHRONIC) - Category 3 SKIN SENSITIZATION - Category 1 SPECIFIC TARGET ORGAN TOXICITY (REPEATED EXPOSURE): ORAL - Category 2 : R22- Harmful if swallowed. R43- May cause sensitisation by skin contact. R50/53- Very toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment. R52/53- Harmful to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.
: Xn - Harmful N - Dangerous for the environment : 2 : 2011-09-16. : 2011-09-16 : 2011-09-16. : Material Compliance Management +49 (0) 89 7876 1564
Notice to reader This safety datasheet applies only to products originally packaged and labelled by KLÜBER LUBRICATION. The information contained therein is protected by copyright and must not be reproduced or amended without the express written approval of KLÜBER LUBRICATION. This document may be passed on only to the extent required by law. Any dissemination of our safety datasheets (e.g. as a document for download from the Internet) beyond this legally required extent is not permitted without express written consent. KLÜBER LUBRICATION provides its customers with amended safety datasheets as prescribed by law. The customer is responsible for passing on safety datasheets and any amendments contained therein to its own customers, employees and other users of the product. KLÜBER LUBRICATION provides no guarantee that safety datasheets received by users from third parties are up-to-date. All information and instructions in this safety datasheets were compiled to the best of our knowledge and are based on the information available to us. The data provided are intended to describe the product in relation to the required safety measures; they are neither an assurance of characteristics nor a guarantee of the product's suitability for particular applications and do not justify any contractual legal relationships.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
2093.8474.72 :
41/168
- 11 -
E-2
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
42/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
43/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
44/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Operation using the TDU900
3 Operation The TDU900 is a display unit with asystems touchscreen function a graphical user interface for the configuration of transmitter from the 9000 and family.
3.1 Operation using the TDU900
3.1.1
Opening the Display
The display is located inside the TDU900 operating unit in the idle state. 1. Unlock the display by pressing hard on the trapezoidal area. 2. The display slowly slides forward out of the device. 3. Tilt the display until you have reached the most ergonomically comfortable angle for operation.
3.1.2
Closing the Display 1. Tilt the display to a horizontal position until you can feel the display lock in. 2. Push the display until the limit stop in the TDU900's casing until the display locks into the transport lock by itself. 3. The display illumination automatically shuts off in this state. Tip: Close the operating unit during long periods of inactivity to prolong the service life of the backlighting.
3.1.3
Using the Touchscreen Function The display is outfitted with a touchscreen function for operating all of the transmitter functions. The interface can be damaged or destroyed if sharp-edged objects are used. Therefore, only use your finger to operate the touch screen.
1. A light touch on a button suffices for initiating a user action. 2. A button lights up in orange while your finger remains there. The action is executed only when you remove your finger from the button.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
21
45/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Operation via a Web Browser
Tip: To cancel an unintended selected action, slide your finger to the side away from the button highlighted orange and then lift your finger.
3.2 Operation via a Web Browser Supported operating systems ●
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 (32 and 64 bit versions)
Supported web browsers Any browser with an installed Java plug-in at version 1.6.0-25 or higher (Java SE6 update 25)
3.2.1
Network Connection Process and Login 1. Create a physical network connection to the transmitter. The following options are available: a) Remote access using a wide area network (WAN) b) Local access directly to a transmitter using a LAN cable 2. Start the web browser; enter the following information in the address bar: a) The IP address of the transmitter The website for operating the transmitter is retrieved (login page). 3. Enter your user name and password. Note: The following login information is preconfigured at the factory ● User name: Query Password: 1234 ● User name: Operation Password: 1234 ● User name: Maintenance Password: 1234 ●
User name: Configuration Password: 1234
Change the user names and passwords after your first time logging in chapter 3.3.7.2, "Managing Users", on page 28 After successfully logging in, the actual user interface is displayed.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
22
46/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
3.3 Design of the User Interface
3.3.1
Elements of the User Interface The user interface is composed of the following elements: ●
Menu bar: The menu bar provides access to the most important functions.
●
System status: This display provides a constant, visible, general overview of the entire system status.
●
Path bar: The path bar shows the current position within the menu structure and provides the
●
ability to quickly return to higher menu levels. Working area: The various tasks and configuration steps are carried out in the working area.
1 = Menu bar 2 = System status 3 = Path bar 4 = Working area
3.3.2
Views The user interface provides two different views of the transmitter system: ●
Device View
●
Task View
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
23
47/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
Device View In this view, all of the transmitter's functions are structured in the form of block diagrams. All parameters relevant to operation are accessible.
Fig. 3-1: Hierarchical structure of a transmitter system 1 = View of transmitter system level 2 = View of single-transmitter level 3 = View of exciter level
Task view In this view, certain, frequently recurring tasks are combined. One task includes exactly those parameters, which are required for working on this task across devices. All of the parameters relevant to startup and maintenance are accessible. Certain parameters are only accessible in the Task View.
3.3.3
Basic Menu Bar Functions All of the functions of the TDU900 that are required for basic operation of a transmitter are combined in the menu bar. The following functions are available there: ●
Logbook
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
24
48/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
3.3.3.1
●
Help
●
Local/Remote
●
Login/Logout
●
Device View
●
Task View
Logbook The logbook is used for logging all of the events in the system and is used for debugging and error analysis.
3.3.3.2
Help This button enables activation of the help function. The following steps are to be carried out: 1. Press the Help button. All elements for which help information is available are marked with a blue frame. 2. Select the desired element. The corresponding help information is shown in a separate window.
3.3.3.3
Local/Remote Operation of the transmitter can be done using local access as well as using remote access. The Local/Remote button allows toggling between both types of access. The transmitter can be toggled to local operation from remote control at any time. If local operation is currently underway, then remote control is not possible for safety reasons. The current status (L=Local, R=Remote) is shown directly on the Local/Remote button. The corresponding status of each transmitter is shown individually for multiple-transmitter systems.
3.3.3.4
Login/Logout The login dialog enables a user to log in or log out of the system.
3.3.3.5
Device View This button enables switching to device view.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
25
49/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
3.3.3.6
Task View This button enables switching to Task View.
3.3.4
Navigation Navigation through the transmitter menus is done in Device View. By pressing on a visibly highlighted block diagram element, you can navigate deeper in the transmitter structure. Parameters that may be spread out over multiple tabs are located on the lowest menu level. A path bar is shown at the bottom of the screen. : This has two functions:
3.3.5
●
Display of the current menu level
●
Return to higher menu levels
Input fields Additional information regarding the editability of respective parameters are visualized using icons on the display and input fields. The various display forms have the following meaning: ●
This value is editable without limitation. ●
This value is editable, but has no effect in the current configuration. ●
This value was changed and not yet stored in a preset. ●
This value is not editable with the currently applicable user rights.
3.3.6
Editors All of the functions of the TDU900 that are required for basic operation of a transmitter are combined in the menu bar. The following functions are available there:
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
26
50/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
3.3.6.1
Numeric editor The numeric editor is outfitted with the following functions.
1 = Pressing one of these buttons changes the value right in the display, without using the Enter button. 2 = When this button is pressed, the value entered using the numeric keypad is applied in the system. 3 = When this button is pressed, all changes made in this window are discarded and the original value is restored.
If the allowed value range is violated, an error message appears and the input elements (Increase/Decrease/Enter) are disabled. 3.3.6.2
Text editor The text editor enables letters, numbers, and special characters to be entered.
3.3.7 Special tasks
3.3.7.1
Finding an Error Two different means are available for locating an error: ●
Block Diagrams The elements of the block diagram lead to the cause of the error in a few steps using their traffic light signaling as long as the error is currently active. Valuable information
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
27
51/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
about an error's cause and tips for correcting the error can be retrieved using the help function of the respective error message. ●
Logbook Complex error situations including behavior over time can be analyzed using the logbook. The help function makes a multitude of valuable information available here as well
3.3.7.2
Managing Users User management is only accessible by operating the TDU900 using a web browser. To do so, all you have to do is select the following login: User name: Superuser Password: 1234 For additional details see chapter 7, "User Administration", on page 143.
3.3.8
Logbook All system events are recorded in the logbook. The following functions are available for simplifying debugging and error analysis:
3.3.8.1
●
Chronological View Events are shown in their chronological order.
●
Filter (filter and options) Events or event groups can be chosen selectively with the help of specific criteria.
●
Scroll function Enables fast navigation in long event lists
Chronological View All of the event messages are listed strictly chronologically here. Here, the newest messages are always at the top of the list.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
28
52/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Operation Design of the User Interface
Fig. 3-2: Logbook – Chronological View
A thread consists of a group of messages that refer to the same event. The color of the thread is determined by the most critical message within the thread. Clicking a thread marker opens a window with the corresponding messages.
Fig. 3-3: Logbook – Thread 1 = Thread marker 2 = Open the detail view by clicking
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
29
53/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
For most messages there is an entry for both the occurrence and the expiration of a message. Each entry consists of the following information: ● Alarm level – Error
–
Error is over/remedied
–
Warning
–
Warning is over
–
Info
●
Error message text
●
System component (control, amplifier, exciter, etc.)
●
Time
Clicking an entry within the thread view displays a detailed description with the following contents.
●
From: To: Displays the time when an event starts or ends.
●
State: Indicates whether an event is still active or already remedied.
●
Duration: Indicates how long an event was active.
●
Component: Indicates the system components affected by an event.
●
Description:
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
30
54/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
Displays a detailed description of an event. 3.3.8.2
Filter (filter/options)
Fig. 3-4: Logbook – Filter/options
The filter function allows filtering of the messages according to the following criteria:
3.3.8.3
●
Level filter: The messages can be filtered selectively according to individual or multiple levels (Info | Warning | Fault) at the same time by selecting/deselecting the checkboxes "Show Infos", "Show Warnings", and "Show Faults". Selecting the "Show open issues only" checkbox will cause only messages that are still active to be displayed, in other words, messages that still have not been remedied,
●
Component filter: The messages can be filtered selectively according to individual or multiple system components (System | Exciter A/B | Output Stage) at the same time by selecting/ deselecting the checkboxes.
●
Options: The following options are available: – Clear logbook With "Clear Logbook" you can completely delete the contents of the logbook. –
Restore logbook With "Restore Logbook" you can restore the logbook after accidentally deleting it.
–
Messages The "Messages" display shows the number of entries in the logbook.
–
Close The entire filter function can be closed with "Close".
Scroll function The scroll function enables navigation within a long event list and the selection and detailed view of specific events.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
31
55/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operation
R&S THU9/TMU9
Design of the User Interface
Fig. 3-5: Scroll functions 1 = Scroll box 2 3 4 5 6
= = = = =
Scroll thumb Entry up Page up Entry down Page down
By clicking within the scroll box you can directly position the "Scroll Thumb" at the corresponding place. Entry-Down: This button allows scrolling downwards by one entry in the direction of the oldest date. Entry-Up: This button allows scrolling upwards by one entry in the direction of the newest date. Page-Down: This button allows scrolling by one page at a time in the direction of the oldest date. Page-Up: This button allows scrolling by one page at a time in the direction of the newest date.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
32
56/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Overview
4 Device View Description 4.1 System Overview
4.1.1 Device View Home The screenshot below shows the Device View Home menu view. It represents the transmitter system level. The function of the individual buttons and the meaning of specific parameters are explained in the following chapters.
Fig. 4-1: Device View Home menu view
4.1.1.1
Forward Power The "Forward Power" field indicates the forward power of the transmitter system in kW. This field lights up green provided that the forward power is above the user ‑selectable warning threshold. If the forward power drops to the warning level, the field lights up yellow. If the forward power drops below the user ‑selectable fault threshold, the field lights up red. Pressing the green area opens the "Power and Limits" view. The following user ‑selectable values are displayed in the Forward Power field: ●
Power (in percent) Forward power: can be set between 0 % and 130 %. The nominal transmitter power corresponds to 100 %.
●
Warning Limit (in dB)
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
33
57/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Overview
Warning threshold: can be set between 0 dB and ‒20 dB.
4.1.1.2
●
Fault Limit (in dB) Fault threshold: can be set between 0 dB and ‒20 dB.
●
RF Fail Timeout (in s). Delay time: can be set between 0 s and 10 s. This is the time between undershooting of the "Fail Limit" fault threshold and indication of the fault in the transmitter status display.
Reflected Power The "Reflected Power" field indicates the reflected power of the transmitter system in W. This field lights up green provided that the reflected power is below the user ‑selectable warning threshold. If the reflected power exceeds this threshold, the field lights up yellow.
‑
If the reflected power exceeds the user selectable fault threshold, the field lights up red. Pressing the green area opens the "Power and Limits" view. The following user ‑selectable values are displayed in the Forward Power field:
4.1.1.3
●
Warning Limit (in dB) Warning threshold: can be set between ‒28 dB and ‒17 dB.
●
Fault Limit (in dB) Fault threshold: can be set between ‒17 dB and ‒14 dB.
Transmitter The function of the Transmitter button is explained in the next chapter; see chapter 4.2, "Transmitter", on page 37.
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Value access
Program On
Switch used to switch the components in the program path of Off; On the transmitter on and off.
Operation
Reserve On
Switch used to switch all components in the standby path of Off; On the transmitter on and off (standby exciter with "dual drive" redundancy concept and standby output stage with "active PA Reserve" redundancy concept).
Operation
Reset Faults
Switch used to reset all faults stored in the transmitter. Stored
Operation
faults are: Reflection Fail. Resetting stored faults can cause automatic redundancy functions, which are currently in the switched-over state, to switch back to their original preselected state.
Program The currently active program 1 can be switched off using the "Program 1 – ON/OFF" button.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
34
58/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description System Overview
4.1.1.4
N+1 Redundancy The task of the N+1 automatic function is to provide a B standby transmitter for up to eight A transmitters. This B transmitter takes over the program of an A transmitter if an A transmitter signals a fault. The output of the B transmitter is normally connected to a dummy antenna. The B transmitter is connected to an antenna by the N+1 automatic function as soon as the B transmitter takes over the program of the A transmitter. Manual Switchover Manual switchover of a program from an A transmitter to the B transmitter is performed by connecting the A transmitter concerned to the dummy antenna (button: To Load on the corresponding A transmitter). As a result of this switchover, a) the A transmitter becomes the standby transmitter for the B transmitter and b) the B transmitter is now no longer available as the standby transmitter for other A transmitters (exception: priority control). Automatic Switchover If the N+1 automatic function is active and ready for operation and the A transmitter is available for the N+1 automatic function, a fault in the A transmitter causes the program to switch over to the B transmitter. The N+1 automatic function signals the switchover by changing its status to "changed". The user can now either acknowledge the switchover by pressing the "Accept changeover" key and adopt it as the new operating state, or attempt by pressing the "Reset Faults" key to reset the N+1 automatic function to the original state and to delete the fault which caused the switchover. Configuring N+1 Automatic Function The switching behavior of the N+1 automatic function with regard to checkout times and automatic switchback can be configured according to individual requirements. Furthermore, for the B transmitter it is possible to define the A transmitter from which the program settings are to be adopted when the B transmitter operates as a standby transmitter. Configuring Program Specific Settings The B transmitter must store all program‑specific settings of all A transmitters internally so that they can be activated immediately in the event of a fault. Program‑specific settings are all settings which directly affect the signal path through the transmitter, i.e. settings for the coder, the exciter inputs and outputs, the transmit frequency and the output power. The program‑specific settings are made at the A transmitters and stored using the menu item "Save Preset" in the Task View of the A transmitter. The settings stored for the A transmitters are synchronized with the B transmitter automatically even if the B transmitter was switched off when the settings were stored. If the program‑specific settings are changed at A transmitters without these settings being stored as presets, the changes will not be available on the B transmitter in the event of a switchover. Presets can only be stored on the A transmitters. Configuring Power Specific Settings All settings which have been stored on an A transmitter as presets and synchronized with the B transmitter can be overwritten individually in the B transmitter. This can be used to
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
35
59/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Overview
calibrate the power test points of the B transmitter to the frequency and output power of the respective A transmitter. To do so, the "Program Settings" of the A transmitter concerned must be activated in the B transmitter ("Load Program Settings") and then the corresponding settings must be made menus of("Save the B Tx transmitter. Finally, changed settings must be stored in theinBthe transmitter B Settings"). Thisthe must be repeated for all programs that the B transmitter can take over. Settings that have been changed directly at the B transmitter are no longer synchronized with the B transmitter using the "Save Preset" function on the A transmitters. It is therefore recommended to overwrite the preset settings of the A transmitters at the B transmitter only for purposes of calibrating the power test points, and never to make program‑specific settings directly at the B transmitter. If a setting has been inadvertently changed on the B transmitter and stored for an A transmitter, automatic synchronization can be reactivated for this setting value in the following way: ●
On the B transmitter, set the setting value to the same value as on the A transmitter.
●
Press "Save Tx B Settings" in the menu of the N+1 automatic function
This setting value is now synchronized again together with all program‑specific setting values of the A transmitter "N+1 Automatic" parameters ●
Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Automatic" > "n+1 Automatic"
GUI name (exter- Help text (English) nal) Automatic (Auto Switch)
Value range
Used to activate the n+1 automatic function. If the n+1 automatic function On, Off is active, a fault within an A transmitter causes a switchover and the program of the A transmitter is taken over by the standby B transmitter.
Value access
Read / Write (Operation)
Guard Time (Auto Checkout time which must pass before an A transmitter is replaced by Switch) the standby B transmitter. A long Guard Time suppresses switchover operations caused by brief faults, but also reduces the availability of the program.
0 s to 60 s
Read / write (maintenance)
Switch Mode (Auto Switch)
Single, Multiple
Read / write (maintenance)
Read / write
Used to define the switching behavior of the N+1 automatic function. Single switch: Switchover of an A transmitter to the B transmitter can occur once only. Multiple switch: Following a switchover operation, the system can switch back to the A transmitter automatically when the A transmitter no longer signals a fault but the B transmitter indicates a fault. If priority control is active, this switch should be set to Multiple Switch.
Load Program Settings (Auto Switch)
Used to load the program‑specific settings of an A transmitter to the B transmitter.
Tx A1, Tx A2, Tx A3, Tx A4, Tx A5, Tx A6, Tx A7, Tx A8
Save Tx B Settings (Auto Switch)
Used to save settings, which have been changed relative to the loaded A transmitter, in the B transmitter.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
36
60/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description Transmitter
GUI name (exter- Help text (English) nal)
Value range
Value access
Automatic (Sta-
Indicates the status of the N+1 automatic function by means of three
On, Off, Ready,
Read only
tus)
elements. If the N+1 automatic function is on, it can be "ready"/"not ready" and at the same time "changed"/"not changed".
Not Ready, Changed
Tx B is Reserve for (Status)
If a switchover operation has taken place, this indicates which program Tx A1, Tx A2, Tx A3, Tx A4, Tx A5, of an A transmitter the B transmitter has taken over. Tx A6, Tx A7, Tx A8
Read only
RF Switch (Status)
Indicates a fault if in the event of a switchover one of the RF switches Ready / Not could not be turned correctly or if one of the jumpers has not been posi- Ready tioned correctly on the patch panel (if used).
Read only
4.2 Transmitter The screenshot below shows the Transmitter menu view. It represents the single transmitter level. The function of the individual buttons and the meaning of specific parameters are explained in the following chapters.
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
Automatic Switchover Functions
Automatic Input Signal Switchover The R&S®TCE900 in the R&S®TCE900 exciter configuration has an automatic switchover function which, in the event of a signal failure at one logical input, switches over to the other logical input (provided that a valid input signal is available at the other logical
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
37
61/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description Transmitter
input). Before a failure occurs, the preselected input is active. The way in which this automatic switchover function operates is determined by the following factors:
Automatic input switchover ON/OFF If automatic switchover is OFF, the preselected input remains active even if the input signal fails. If automatic switchover is ON and there is a failure at the (preselected) input, switchover to the standby input takes place. Input priority (Preferred Input = Logical Input 1/2) Following a switchover of the priority logical input to the standby input, the automatic system switches back to this priority input as soon as a signal reappears. All switchover operations are delayed for the set delay times. If the signal fails at both the main input and the standby input, the priority input remains active. Inputs with equal priority (Preferred Input = none) Following a switchover of the active logical input, the second input with the same priority remains active until the input signal also fails on this input. The automatic system switches back to the preselected input, but only if a signal is present on it once again (and if "Switch to" is set to "reserve & back"). All switchover operations are delayed for the set delay times. Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
Direction of switchover (Switch to) The "reserve & back" switch position enables switchover in both directions, i.e. to and from the standby input, depending on which of the two logical inputs is currently faulty. The "reserve" switch position ensures that switchover takes place once only. Following switchover, the automatic system switches to "switched" and the "Active" indicator disappears. Switchback to the preselected input takes place when the active input is switched over by pressing the input selector switch (Selector) and then selecting the preselected input.
If the switch is set to "reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Manual switchover between inputs The input can be switched over in the "Home" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by pressing the input selector switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired input. Depending on the configuration and switching state (ON/OFF) of the automatic input signal switchover function, this menu contains either the switch used to change the preferred input or the switch used to switch over the active input. The automatic input signal switchover function is configured in the following way:
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
38
62/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
1. Using the menu bar, navigate to the following: "Devices" > "Tx
" > "Exciter A|B" > "Input Auto" 2. The following parameters must be defined in the Automatic tab: a) for Configuration: ● Automatic: ● Preferred Input: ● Guard Time to Reserve: ● Guard Time Back: ● Switch to: b) for Reserve Control: ● If Reserve Input Fails. c) for Seamless Switching: ● ● ● d) for ● ● ●
Seamless Switching: Delay between Inputs Pre-Delay: Input Control: Force Exciter Changeover: Mute on Input Fail If Reserve Input fails
Parameters for automatic input signal switchover GUI name (exter- Help text (English)
Value range
Value access
undefined, Not Ready, Ready, Changed+Ready, Changed+Not Ready
Read only
nal) Automatic (State)
Indicates the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Not Ready: ● The automatic switchover function is not ready. An input signal is not present at the standby input or a switchover has already taken place and the automatic switchover function is configured such that automatic switchback is not permitted. Ready: ● The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the currently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon as the input signal of the currently active input fails. Changed: ● The automatic switchover function has switched over from the preferred input to the standby input.
Seamless Switch- Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. undefined, not Possible, Possiing "Not Possible" always appears if only one input signal is supplied or in ble cases where two different data streams are present at the two inputs. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes place immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard Time to Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set.
Read only
Automatic
Activates automatic switchover of the input signal to the standby input if Off, On the preferred input fails.
Operation
Preferred Input
Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal switchover function should use whenever possible.
Operation
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Input 1, Input 2, No Preference
39
63/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
GUI name (exter- Help text (English) nal) Active Input
Value range
Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input signal Input 1, Input 2
Value access
Operation
switchover function is off. If the automatic switchover function is on, the input can only be switched over using this switch if Preferred Input is set to "No Preference" or a switc hover to the standby input has taken place. Switch to
Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover func- Reserve Only, Reserve & Back tion. "To Reserve Only": ● The automatic switchover function switches over once from the preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not ready" state". Switching the active input over manually to the preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function. "To Reserve and Back": ● Following successful switchover to the s tandby input, the automatic switchover function can also switch back automatically if the signal at the standby input fails.
Maintenance
Guard Time to Reserve
Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic switch- over function switches over to the standby input if the input signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly).
Maintenance
Guard Time Back
Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic switch- over function switches back to the preferred input if the input signal at the standby input fails. If seamless switching is possible, switchover always takes place immediately without interruption regardless of the set guard time. If "to Reserve Only" was selected as the "Direction", the set guard time has no effect.
Maintenance
If Reserve Fails
Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be moni- Do Not Show Warning, Show tored. If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the standby Warning ● input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show Warning" must be selected. If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the transmit● ter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Maintenance
4.2.1.2
Automatic Exciter Switchover The automatic exciter switchover function enables a faulty exciter to be automatically switched over to a functional standby exciter. In the "Exciter Automatic" menu it is possible to switch automatic switchover between two exciters on and off and to select the basic operating behavior of the function. The "Switch Mode" switch is used to select whether automatic switchover to a standby exciter is to take place once only (Single Switch) or whether a switchback is also to be performed if the standby exciter signals a fault, but the preselected exciter is no longer faulty (Multiple Switch). It is also possible to set a guard time which must always expire before a switchover can take place. This prevents unwanted switchover operations resulting from brief fault events.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
40
64/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
Operation One of the two exciters can be preselected for operation by pressing the exciter selector switch (or via the ExciterAuto -> Exciter Switch tab). This exciter is switched on together with the output stage by pressing the "Program Path On" switch (in the "Transmitter" menu). If necessary, the RF of the standby exciter can be switched on for measuring and monitoring purposes by pressing the "Reserve Path (on)" switch (in the "Transmitter" menu). A switchover operation causes the standby exciter to become the main exciter and vice versa. The ON/OFF switches then act on the other exciter in each case. "Single Switch" mode If a fault occurs in the preselected exciter, the automatic switchover function will swap the main and standby exciter and display an "Automatic changed" message. Either the new state can now be accepted by changing the "preselected exciter" ("Automatic changed" disappears) the automatic switchover function inal state by pressing "Resetor Faults" (in the "Transmitter" menu). can be reset to its orig"Multiple Switch" mode This mode is identical to "Single Switch", except that following a double switchover operation the "preselected" exciter becomes the active exciter again. The "Automatic Changed" message is still displayed in this case. To delete this message, either the new state of the automatic switchover can be adopted by pressing the "Recommand Selection" button (in the "Transmitter" > "Exciter Auto" menu, "Exciter Switch" tab) or the original state can be assumed again by pressing "Reset Faults" (in the Transmitter menu).
4.2.2
Transmitter Status
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Value access
Program On
Indicates whether all components in the program path of the transmitter have been switched on or off (standby exciter with "Dual Drive" redundancy concept and standby output stage with "active PA Reserve" redundancy concept).
Off; On
Read only
Reserve On
Indicates whether all components in the standby path of the transmitter have been switched on or off (standby exciter with "Dual Drive" redundancy concept and standby output stage with "active PA Reserve" redundancy concept).
Off; On
Read only
Overall LED
Gray: Off
Read only
Green: OK Yellow: Warning Red: Fault RF LED
Gray: Off
Read only
Green: OK Yellow: Warning Red: Fault
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
41
65/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Reflection LED
Value range Gray: Off
Value access
Read only
Yellow: Warning Red: Fault Automatic (Backup Drive / Dual Drive)
Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function has been activated. If the automatic switchover function is active, the system will switch over to the standby exciter if the active exciter fails.
Ready (Backup Drive / Dual Drive)
Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function is Yes; No ready. If "not ready" is indicated, either the automatic exciter switchover function has already switched over to the standby exciter or a fault has occurred in the exciter switch.
changed Over (Backup Drive / Dual Drive)
Indicates whether the automatic exciter switchover function has switched over to a standby exciter.
Read only
switch Failed (Backup Drive / Dual Drive)
Indicates that switchover to the standby exciter has failed.
Read only
4.2.3
Off; On
Read only
Read only
Amplifiers
Fig. 4-2: "Amplifiers" menu view (Multi Tx)
PHU901/902: "Status" parameters ●
Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Amplifier " > "Status" tab
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
42
66/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description Transmitter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Amplifier
Indicates whether the amplifier has been switched on or off by the TCE900 Tx control.
Off, On
Read only
Link
Indicates the s tatus of the communic ation link between the amplifier and Ok, Warning the TCE900 Tx control.
Read only
The status is indicated as follows: Ok ● A link exists between the amplifier and the TCE900 Tx control. Warning ● No link exists between the amplifier and the TCE900 Tx control. Check the power supply of the amplifier. RF In Fail
Indicates that the amplifier is receiving an input signal, the level of which No, Yes (warning) Read only is too low. If this message occurs at all amplifiers at the same time, the fault is ● located at the exciter switch, splitter or exciter. If this fault occurs at only some of the amplifiers, the output level of ● the exciters and splitter must be checked. If the fault occurs at only one amplifier, the self ‑engaging connector ● of the RF signal on the rear panel of the amplifier must be checked for mechanical damage.
Mute
Indicates that the amplifier is suppressing its output signal.
No, Yes (warning) Read only
This indicator appears in the following cases: No input signal is present ● During bias adjustment ● ● An external absorber signals via connector X11 that it is overheating. Init Fail
Indicates a fault if the amplifier detects an internal fault at power ON. If No, Yes (fault) other faults are indicated at the same time, the cause of these faults must be rectified first. If the "Init Fail" fault still exists after other faults have been rectified, the amplifier must be replaced.
Reflection
Indicates whether the reflection at the RF output is becoming too great.
Read only
No, Yes (warning) Read only
In this case, the antenna as well as the link between the amplifiers and the antenna via the coupling switches and output stage switches (if present) must be checked. The occurrence of reflection is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After the reason for the reflection has been rectified, this message must be reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or "Reset Faults System" button. RF Power Fail
Indicates that the output power of the amplifier is more than 3 dB below the nominal value.
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
Temp. Fail
Indicates that the amplifier has overheated internally.
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
The shut‑off taps for the coolant must be checked. They must be open. The occurrence of this message is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After the reason for the overheating has been rectified, this message must be reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or "Reset Faults System" button. Transistor Fail
Indicates that one or more driver or power transistors are defective. NOTE: Only personnel with the relevant special service training are permitted to change the transistors.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
43
67/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
Name
Description
BIAS Fail
Indicates a fault if the quiescent current of one or more transistors cannot No Error, Abort be adjusted. Adjust, Error on ● ●
●
Value range
Access right Read only
"No Error": Automatic quiescent current adjustment has been perPA On, Adjust formed properly. Error Abort Adjust: Adjustment has been aborted because a constant temperature has not settled in the amplifier. In this case, adjustment should be started again immediately after the fault has occurred. "Error on PA On" or "Adjust Error": There is a technical fault in the amplifier; the amplifier should be replaced.
Doherty Active
Indicates whether the Doherty mode of the amplifier is active or not.
Off, On
Read only
Freq. ID
With PHU902 only:
2, 4, 5, 6
Read only
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
0 °C to 150 °C
Read only
Indicates the frequency ranges in which the amplifier can be operated in Doherty mode. 2: 575 MHz to 660 MHz 4: 470 MHz to 500 MHz; 660 MHz to 715 MHz 5: 500 MHz to 530 MHz; 715 MHz to 750 MHz 6: 530 MHz to 575 MHz; 750 MHz to 790 MHz If the option is not suitable for the transmit frequency, the amplifier automatically switches to broadband mode. Regulation Fail
Indicates that the internal power regulation of the amplifier has reached the limit of its control range. This is an indication that one or more power transistors are defective.
Amplifier Temp.
Indicates the temperature of the amplifier. The amplifier temperature is usually a few degrees higher than the coolant temperature. If it is more than 15 °C higher, either the shut‑off taps for the coolant are closed or the flow rate of the coolant is too low ( c hapter 4.4, "Cooling", on page 101).
Absorber Fail
Indicates that overheating of the rack absorber has been detected.
No, Yes (warning) Read only
Normally, this warning is signaled by all amplifiers of a transmitter simultaneously. If the warning is signaled by only one amplifier, check the rack cabling. Coolant Temp.
Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing out of the transmitter rack toward the heat exchanger. The temperature must not exceed a maximum value of 65 °C.
Read only
RF Monitor
Indicates the coupling attenuation of the "RF Monitor" test point on the amplifier at 650 MHz.
0.00 dB to +99.99 dB
Read only
AC Fail
Indicates a fault if the mains voltage has been interrupted. The circuit breakers must be checked in this case.
No; Yes (warning) Read only
DC Fail
Indicates whether one of the internal power supply units of the amplifier No; Yes (fault) is not delivering DC voltage.
Read only
Detection of a fault is only possible if the RF of the transmitter has been switched on (Program on). Supply Fail
Indicates that one of the internal power supply units is probably not work- No, Yes (fault) ing.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Read only
44
68/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
PMU901: "Status" parameters ●
Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Amplifier " > "Status" tab
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Amplifier
Indicates whether the amplifier has been switched on or off by the CCU (central control unit).
Off, On
Read only
Link
Indicates the status of the c ommunic ation link between the amplifier and Ok, Warning the TCE900 Tx control.
Read only
The status is indicated as follows: Ok ● A link exists between the amplifier and the TCE900 Tx control. Warning ● No link exists between the amplifier and the TCE900 Tx control. Check the power supply of the amplifier. RF In Fail
Indicates that the amplifier is receiving an input signal, the level of which No, Yes (warning) is too low. If this message occurs at all amplifiers at the same time, the fault is ● located at the exciter switch, splitter or exciter. If this fault occurs at only some of the amplifiers, the output level of ● the exciters and splitter must be checked. If the fault occurs at only one amplifier, the self ‑engaging connector ● of the RF signal on the rear panel of the amplifier must be checked for mechanical damage.
Read only
Mute
Indicates that the amplifier is suppressing its output signal.
No, Yes (warning)
Read only
Init Fail
Indicates a fault if the amplifier detects an internal fault at power ON. If No, Yes (fault) other faults are indicated at the same time, the cause of these faults must be rectified first. If the "Init Fail" fault still exists after other faults have been rectified, the amplifier must be replaced.
Read only
RF Monitor
Indicates the coupling attenuation of the "RF Monitor" test point on the amplifier at 650 MHz.
0.00 dB to +99.99 dB
Read only
Reflection
Indicates whether the reflection at the RF output is becoming too great.
No, Yes (warning)
Read only
RF Power Fail
Indicates that the output power of the amplifier is more than 3 dB below No, Yes (fault) the nominal value.
Read only
Temp. Fail
Indicates that the amplifier has overheated internally.
Read only
This indicator appears in the following cases: No input signal ● During bias adjustment ● ●
An external absorber signals via connector X11 that it is overheating.
In this case, the antenna as well as the link between the amplifiers and the antenna via the combiners and output stage switches (if present) must be checked. The occurrence of reflection is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After the reason for the reflection has been rectified, this message must be reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or "Reset Faults System" button.
No, Yes (fault)
The shut‑off taps for the coolant must be checked. They must be open. The occurrence of this message is stored in a nonvolatile memory. After the reason for the overheating has been rectified, this message must be reset manually by pressing the "Reset Faults Transmitter" button or "Reset Faults System" button.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
45
69/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description Transmitter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Transistor Fail
Indicates that one or more driver or power transistors are defective.
No, Yes
Read only
NOTE: Only personnel with the relevant special service training are permitted to change the transistors. BIAS Fail
Indicates a fault if the quiescent current of one or more transistors cannot be adjusted. "No Error": Automatic quiescent current adjustment has been per● formed properly. ● Abort Adjust: Adjustment has been aborted because a constant temperature has not settled in the amplifier. In this case, adjustment should be started again immediately after the fault has occurred. "Error on PA On" or "Adjust Error": There is a technical fault in the ● amplifier; the amplifier should be replaced.
No Error, Abort Adjust, Error on PA On, Adjust Error
Read only
Amplifier Temp.
Indicates the temperature of the amplifier. The amplifier should only be switched on at temperatures above 0 °C.
‒30 °C to 120 °C
Read only
Frequency Fail
This fault occurs if the tunit (tuning unit) used in the amplifier is not suit- No, Yes (fault) able for the RF of the exciter. The tunit is a plug-in module and is on the top side of the amplifier. Please check that the used tunit is suitable for the frequency which is set in the Output menu of the exciter, and whether it has been installed in the amplifier in the "Doherty" or "Broadband" position corresponding to the setting in the "Basic Config" menu.
Read only
Freq. ID
Shows the ID of the tunit (tuning unit) which is installed in the amplifier. 0 to 7 and ‒31 The operating frequency which is set for the transmitter, and the resulting center frequency of the operating channel must be suitable for the operating frequency range of the tunit.
Read only
The ID 0 is shown if the amplifier is operated in broadband mode. The ID ‒31 is shown if no tunit is connected. 1: 502 MHz to 518 MHz; 614 MHz to 630 MHz; 750 MHz to 758 MHz 2: 470 MHz to 486 MHz; 574 MHz to 598 MHz; 710 MHz to 726 MHz; 830 MHz to 854 MHz 3: 558 MHz to 574 MHz; 686 MHz to 710 MHz; 814 MHz to 830 MHz 4: 550 MHz to 558 MHz; 670 MHz to 686 MHz; 790 MHz to 814 MHz 5: 534 MHz to 550 MHz; 646 MHz to 670 MHz; 774 MHz to 790 MHz 6: 518 MHz to 534 MHz; 630 MHz to 646 MHz; 758 MHz to 774 MHz 7: 486 MHz to 502 MHz; 598 MHz to 614 MHz; 726 MHz to 750 MHz; 854 MHz to 862 MHz Regulation Fail
Indicates that the internal power regulation of the amplifier has reached the limit of its control range.
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
This is an indication that one or more power transistors are defective. This fault can also occur if the amplifier performs a system check following a TRANSISTOR_FAIL and then continues to run at reduced power. Blower Fail
Indicates a fault if one of the fans of the amplifier module has failed.
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
Absorber Fail
Indicates that overheating of the rack absorber has been detected.
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
‒30 °C to
Read only
Normally, this warning is signaled by all amplifiers of a transmitter simultaneously. If the warning is signaled by only one amplifier, check the rack cabling. Air Inlet
Indicates the inlet air temperature of the amplifier module. It should always be in the range +1 °C to +45 °C.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
+120 °C
46
70/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
AC Fail
Indicates a fault if the mains voltage has been interrupted. The circuit breakers must be checked in this case.
No, Yes (warning)
Read only
AC 1 Ok
Indicates that the mains AC voltage at power supply unit 1 is in the per- No, Yes missible range (only applies to PMU901 with power supply standby).
AC 2 Ok
Indicates that the mains AC voltage at power supply unit 2 is in the per- No, Yes missible range (only applies to PMU901 with power supply standby).
DC Fail
Indicates whether one of the internal power supply units of the amplifier No, Yes (fault) is faulty (e.g. no DC voltage is being delivered).
Read only
Detection of a fault is only possible if the RF of the transmitter has been switched on (Program on). DC 1 Ok
Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 1 is in the permissible range.
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
Supply Fail
Indicates that one of the internal power supply units is probably not work- No, Yes (fault) ing.
Read only
Supply 1 Fail
Indicates that power supply unit 1 (right) is probably faulty (only applies No, Yes (fault) to PMU901 with power supply standby).
Read only
Supply 2 Fail
Indicates that power supply unit 2 (left) is probably faulty (only applies to PMU901 with power supply standby).
No, Yes (fault)
Read only
Air Outlet
Indicates the outlet air temperature of the amplifier module.
‒30 °C to
Read only
This message is only output if an ON command has been iss ued and the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 1 (only applies to PMU901 with power supply standby). DC 2 Ok
Indicates whether the DC voltage of power supply unit 2 is in the permissible range. This message is only output if an ON command has been iss ued and the AC voltage is present at power supply unit 2 (only applies to PMU901 with power supply standby).
+120 °C
"Supply" parameters ●
Name
Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Amplifier " > "Supply" tab
Description
Value range
Access right
V Aux In (Supply) Indicates the supply voltage of the amplifier control board. This auxiliary voltage is generated directly by the power supply unit. This voltage should be present at the amplifier control board even if the amplifier has been switched off by the CCU (central control unit). If no voltage is indicated, the miniature circuit breakers of the power distribution unit as well as the self ‑engaging contacts on the rear panel of the amplifier must be checked first of all. If no fault can be found in the energy feed, the amplifier must be replaced.
Read only
Indicates the voltage supplied to the transistor blocks by the power supply unit.
Read only
V+ Mon (Supply)
If the displayed voltage is 0 V, either the power supply unit is faulty or the amplifier has not been switched on by the CCU (central control unit).
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
47
71/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
Name
Description
Value range
I DC (Amplifier)
Indicates the total current flowing through the internal power supply units.
Access right Read only
If the display shows 0 A, the amplifier may not have been switched on by the CCU (central control unit). Other possible faults are: RF In Fail ● Temperature Fail ● DC Fail. ● I Pre (Amplifier)
Indicates the current flowing through the transistors of the preamplifier module.
Read only
V5V ACB (Amplifier Control Board)
Indicates the 5 V auxiliary voltage which is generated on the amplifier control board from the auxiliary voltage (V_AUX_IN) of the power supply unit.
Read only
If no voltage is indicated, the miniature circuit breakers of the energy distribution unit and also the self ‑engaging contacts on the rear panel of the amplifier should be checked first of all. If no fault can be found in the energy feed, the amplifier must be replaced. V 3V5 (Amplifier Control Board)
Indicates the 3.5 V auxiliary voltage which is generated on the amplifier control board from the auxiliary voltage (V_AUX_IN) of the power supply unit.
Read only
If no voltage is indicated, the miniature circuit breakers of the energy distribution unit and also the self ‑engaging contacts on the rear panel of the amplifier should be checked first of all. If no fault can be found in the energy feed, the amplifier must be replaced. V 12 Mon (Pre Amplifier)
Read only
Indicates the 20 V supply voltage of the preamplifier. PHU901: In the ON state, the voltage is approx. 20 V and is gener● ated on the preamplifier board. The displayed voltage is 0 V if the amplifier has been switched off by the CCU (central control unit). If no voltage is indicated in the ON state, the miniature c ircuit breakers of the energy distribution unit and also the self ‑engaging contacts on the rear panel of the amplifier should be checked first of all. If no fault can be found in the energy feed, the amplifier must be replaced. PMU901: As for PHU901, except that here the 20 V voltage is gen● erated on the amplifier board.
Read only
Indicates the 12 V auxiliary voltage. PHU901: The auxiliary voltage is generated on the preamplifier ● board from the 20 V supply voltage (V PRE MON). If the amplifier
●
V Pre Mon (Pre Amplifier)
has not been switched on by the CCU (central control unit), the voltage is approx. 8 V. PMU901: The auxiliary voltage is generated on the amplifier board from the 20 V supply voltage (V_PRE_MON). If the amplifier has not been switched on by the CCU, the voltage is 0 V.
PHU901/PHU902: "Transistors" parameters ●
Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Amplifier " > "Transistors" tab
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
I PRE
Indic ates the curr ent flowing through the transistors of the preamplifier module.
0 A to 5 A
Read only
I DRV
Indic ates the c urr ent flowing through tr ansistors V12A and V12B of the driver module.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
48
72/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
I 1A
Indicates the current flowing through transistors V14 and V15 of output stage module 1 in transistor block A.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
I 2A
Indicates the current flowing through transistors V16 and V17 of output stage module 2 in transistor block A.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
I 3A
Indicates the current flowing through transistors V18 and V19 of output stage module 3 in transistor block A.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
I 1B
Indicates the current flowing through transistors V24 and V25 of output stage module 1 in transistor block B.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
I 2B
Indicates the current flowing through transistors V26 and V27 of output stage module 2 in transistor block B.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
I 3B
Indicates the current flowing through transistors V28 and V29 of output stage module 3 in transistor block B.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
PMU901: "Transistors" parameters ●
Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Amplifier " > "Transistors" tab
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
I PRE
Indic ates the curr ent flowing through the transistors of the preamplifier module.
0 A to 5 A
Read only
I DRV
Indicates the current flowing through transistor V401.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
I 1A
Indic ates the c urr ent flowing through tr ansistor V500 in trans is tor block A.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
I 2A
Indic ates the current flowing through transis tor V1500 in transis tor bloc k 0 A to 40 A A.
Read only
I 3A
Indic ates the current flowing through transis tor V2500 in transis tor bloc k 0 A to 40 A A.
Read only
I 1B
Indic ates the c urr ent flowing through tr ansistor V600 in trans is tor block B.
0 A to 40 A
Read only
I 2B
Indic ates the current flowing through transis tor V1600 in transis tor bloc k 0 A to 40 A B.
Read only
I 3B
Indic ates the current flowing through transis tor V2600 in transis tor bloc k 0 A to 40 A
Read only
B.
"RF Levels" parameters ●
Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Amplifier " > "RF Levels" tab
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
49
73/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Power A
Indicates the measured voltage of the RF detector in transistor block A (does not apply to PMU901).
0 V to 8 V
Read only
Power B
Indicates the measured voltage of the RF detector in transistor block B (does not apply to PMU901).
0 V to 8 V
Read only
Power V Ref
Indicates the nominal value which is predefined by the central control unit 0 V to 6 V (CCU) for internal regulation of the output power.
Read only
Power Out
Indicates the measured voltage of the RF detector at the output of the amplifier.
0 V to 8 V
Read only
Reflected Out
Indicates the measured voltage of the RF detector for reflected power at 0 V to 8 V the output of the amplifier.
Read only
"Type Plate" parameters ●
Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Output Stage" > "Amplifiers" > "Amplifier " > "Type Plate" tab
Information about the amplifier is set at the factory.
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Name
Instrument designation
Read only
Part Number
R&S material number and order number of the instrument. Specify this number when reporting faults.
Read only
Variant
Instrument variant
Read only
Product Index
Production index (parts change index)
Read only
Serial Number
Serial number
Read only
Production Date
Production date
Read only
SW / FW / Bios Number
Software, firmware or BIOS number
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
50
74/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Transmitter
4.2.4
4.2.4.1
Rack
Status Parameters – Rack
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Absorber
With multi‑rack transmitters, this indicates whether one Green: OK of the rack absorbers is overheating. This fault can occur Red: too hot if several amplifiers of a rack fail and additionally there is a fault in the cooling system.
Read only
Cabinet Door
Indicates whether the rear rack door is open or c losed (does not aapply to TMU9).
Read only
Green: Closed
Value access
Yellow: Open
4.2.5
4.2.5.1
Output Stage
Startup Parameters – Output Stage
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Absorber
With multi‑rack transmitters, this indicates whether one Green: OK of the rack absorbers is overheating. This fault can occur Red: too hot if several amplifiers of a rack fail and additionally there is
Value access Read only
a fault in the cooling system. Cabinet Door
Indicates whether the rear rack door is open or closed.
Green: Closed
Read only
Yellow: Open external Fault
12V Control
Indicates whether an external fault mes sage exis ts at terminal X41 of the mains distribution board. This function is only available if the "use external faults" check mark has been set in the Commissioning dialog box for this rack.
Green: no Fault
Read only
Red: Fault
Indicates whether a backup power supply unit connected Green: OK to terminal X42 of the mains distribution board is still Red: Fault working. This function is only available if the "control
Read only
external 12V supply" check mark has been set in the Commissioning dialog box for this rack. Overvoltage Protectors
Indicates whether the overvoltage protection for the respective component is still functioning.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Green: OK
Read only
Red: Fault
51
75/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description Exciter
4.3 Exciter
4.3.1
4.3.1.1
Coders (Standards)
DVB T2
To operate the transmitter in DVB ‑T2 mode, an appropriate software option must be activated using an option code.
This function is used to set the DVB transmission parameters required for coding and modulation and to check the used (TPS) settings (TPS = transmission parameter signaling) that are signaled during transmission. The network configuration parameters are used to set the higher ‑level parameters for DVB‑T2 that comply with the standard and are valid for all physical layer pipes (PLP). The L1 frame information parameters are used to configure the "L1 post signaling". The PLP parameters are used to make various settings for the possible PLPs. When streaming via TS (TS Stream setting), the PLP parameters can be configured for exactly one PLP. If, however, T2MI is active (T2MI = On), several PLPs from the T2MI information can be configured automatically. To display the settings of a certain PLP, the corresponding ID must be entered in the "Viewed PLP" column. Some of the parameters can only be changed if "Network Interface" is set to "TS Stream" in the transmitter. If "Network Interface" is set to "T2 MI Stream", the parameters are set via the DVB‑T2 gateway. DVB T2 Lite To operate the transmitter in DVB‑T2 Lite mode, an appropriate software option must be activated using an option code.
The DVB‑T2 Lite profile is based on the DVB ‑T2 standard with certain parameters removed and a number of specific additions made that are specifically relevant to mobile reception. The Lite profile has been optimized for the use of inexpensive mobile receivers with low energy consumption, but can also be received using conventional DVB ‑T2 receivers. This is achieved by reducing the range of functions of DVB‑T2, thereby significantly reducing the complexity of the respective receiver modules. The DVB‑T2 profile is configured via the DVB‑T2 gateway and activated automatically in the R&S®TCE900 exciter.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
52
76/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
"Network Configuration" parameters ●
Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter (TX An or TX B) > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder > Network Configuration
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Network Interface (Base Settings)
Indicates the set transport stream (input data stream). TS Stream: Uses the incoming MPEG transport stream directly as ● the payload for an individual PLP transmission.
TS Stream, T2 MI Maintenance Stream
T2 MI Stream: Uses the incoming T2 ‑MI stream of a DVB‑T2 gateway to configure the modulator.
●
The setting can be changed here. T2 MI Packet ID (Base Settings)
Indicates the packet ID of the selected T2 ‑MI elementary stream.
T2 MI Stream ID
Indicates the stream ID of the selected T2‑MI elementary stream.
0 to 8191
Maintenance
0 to 7
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here if Network Interface has been set to T2 MI Stream.
The setting can be changed here if Network Interface has been set to T2 MI Stream. Profile
Indicates whether the exciter generates a DVB‑T2 or DVB‑T2 Lite signal. T2 Base, T2 Base Lite The profile is selected via an external gateway.
Mode (Transmission System)
Indicates the set transmission system. SISO, MISO, Maintenance SISO: (single input, single output) SISO LITE, MISO ● The signal is broadcast by one transmitter only. LITE MISO: (multiple input, single output) ● The signal is broadcast by multiple transmitters that are allocated to different MISO groups (SISO LITE or MISO LITE).
Read only
The settings can be changed here if Network Interface has been set to TS Stream. MISO Source (Transmission System)
Indicates whether the MISO group is to be selected manually or automatically.
Off, Manual, IA
Maintenance
The MISO group can be set either manually directly at the transmitter or automatically using the "Individual Addressing (IA)" data via the DVB‑T2 gateway. The setting can be changed here at any time without the signal being interrupted.
MISO Group (Transmission System)
Indicates the set MISO group.
Used Source (Transmission System)
Indicates the option selected for the MISO group.
Off, Manual, IA
Read only
Used Group (Transmission System)
Indicates the set MISO group.
Group1, Group2, Unused
Read only
The setting can be changed here, provided that Network Interface has been set to TS Stream and MISO mode has been activated.
Unused, Group 1, Maintenance Group2
"L1 Frame Information" parameters ●
Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter (TX An or TX B) > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder > L1 Frame Information
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
53
77/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
No of PLPs (Frame Structure)
Indicates the number of physical layer pipes (PLP) present in the data stream.
1 to 16
Read only
Coderate (Frame Structure)
Indicates the set code rate.
1/2 (3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6)
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.Currently, only the setting "1/2" is permitted. If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway.
2/5, 1/3 (only with DVB‑T2 Lite)
If the software option for the "DVB T2 Lite" mode is used, the code rates 2/5 and 1/3 can also be selected. AUX Streams (Frame Structure)
Indicates the number of auxiliary streams present in the data stream.
0 to 15
Read only
T2 Frames/ Superframe (Frame Structure)
Indicates how many T2 frames make up one superframe.
0 to 255
Maintenance
No, Yes
Maintenance
0 to 4095
Maintenance
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway.
Repetition (Frame Indicates whether repetition of the "preamble information" is switched on Structure) or off. The information in the "preambles" of two successive T2 frames can be repeated in order to attain greater stability for the dynamic portion of the L1 post‑signaling. The use of this function is defined by this parameter. If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway. Data Symbols / Frame (Frame Structure)
Indicates how many data symbols make up one T2 frame.
L1 Post Scramble (Frame Structure)
Indicates whether the L1 post extension is pres ent in the data stream.
Off, On
Read only
T2 Version (Frame Structure)
Indicates the set T2 version.
QPSK, 1.1.1, 1.2.1, 1.3.1
Maintenance
1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here. If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway.
The setting can be changed here. If no T2‑MI interface is used, only Version 1.1.1 is supported. (Versions 1.2.1 and 1.3.1 are also supported via the T2 ‑MI interface.)
FFT Length (Frame Modulation)
Indicates the number of single carriers onto which the T2 signal is to be modulated. The number can be set here. If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway.
Extended FFT (Frame Modula-
Indicates whether additional carriers at the channel boundaries are also No, Yes to be used. If this function is enabled, the information data r ate increases,
tion)
but the spectrum becomes broader, increasing the risk of interference in adjacent channels.
Maintenance
The function can be switched off here. If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway. Modulation (Frame Modulation)
Indicates the set modulation mode. The setting can be changed here.
BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
Maintenance
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
54
78/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Guard Interval (Frame Modula-
Indicates the set guard interval between two T2 symbols.
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, 1/128,
Maintenance
tion)
The setting can be changed here. A long guard interval allows a long distance between the transmitters in an SFN. At the same time, however, it decreases the information data rate.
19/128, 19/256
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway. Bandwidth (Frame Modulation)
Indicates the defined channel bandwidth as it is reported via the L1 signaling by the DVB ‑T2 gateway.
Used Bandwidth (Frame Modulation)
Indicates the channel bandwidth occupied by the DVB‑T2 signal in the frequency spectrum.
For security reasons, this value is not processed further automatically, but must be entered manually. A warning is given in case of an inconsistency.
The setting can be changed here. For security reasons, this setting is ALWAYS made manually for this transmitter. Pilot Pattern (Frame Modulation)
Indicates the used pilot pattern.
PAPR Reduction (Frame Modulation)
Indicates which peak‑to‑average power ratio (PAPR) is set.
The setting can be changed here. If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway.
The setting can be changed here.
1.7 MHz, 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz (10 MHz only on request)
Read only
1.7 MHz, 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz (10 MHz only on request)
Maintenance
PP1, PP2, PP3, PP4, PP5, PP6, PP7, PP8
Maintenance
None, ACE, TR, ACE/TR
Maintenance
The efficiency of the transmitter can be increased by reducing power peaks. Active Constellation Extension (ACE) achieves this effect by shifting the constellation points outward. Tone Reservation (TR): Additional information that lowers the PAPR is added to the signal via individual subcarriers. Both techniques can be combined with each other. If a T2 ‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB‑T2 gateway.
"Localization" parameters ●
Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter (TX An or TX B) > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder > Localization
Name
Description
Value range
Network ID (Iden-
Indicates the currently used network ID that is defined as a unique ID for 0 to 65535
tification)
the current DVB network. If a DVB‑MI interface is used, this value is predefined by the DVB ‑T2 gateway, otherwise this value can be set directly at the transmitter.
Access right Read only
System ID (Identi- Indicates the currently used system ID that is defined as a unique ID for 0 to 65535 fication) the current T2 network within the DVB network (uniquely identifiable via NETWORK_ID).
Read only
Tx ID (Identification)
Maintenance
Indicates the currently used Tx ID.
0 to 65535
This Tx identifier is used to address TV transmitters within a DVB‑T2 network. If desired, certain settings (e.g. Cell ID and MISO Group (Multiple Input Single Output)) can be made individually for each transmitter of a network via the DVB ‑T2 gateway.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
55
79/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Tx/IA Status (Identification)
Indicates whether settings from the "Individual Addressing" parameters Not Used, Not of the data stream are used and whether they are actually available in Available, OK
Access right Read only
the data stream. Source (Cell ID)
Indicates the source from which the currently set cell ID originates.
Manual, L1, IA
Maintenance
0 to 65535
Maintenance
Used Source (Cell Indicates which data source is used for the cell ID. ID) If a TS feed is used, the cell ID must always be set manually at the transmitter. If a T2‑MI feed is used, the data source must be selected using the "Source" parameter.
Manual, L1, IA
Read only
Used (Cell ID)
Indicates the cell ID that identifies the transmitter to the receiver.
0 to 65535
Read only
Source (L1 Frequency)
Indicates which data source has been selected for the frequency offset signaled via the L1 layer.
Manual, L1
Maintenance
0 to 2000000000
Maintenance
0 to 2000000000
Read only
IA, Off
Read only
‒3276.8 µs to
Read only
The cell ID enables the receiver to identify a DVB‑T2 cell. The value can be configured either directly at the transmitter (= manual) or via the data stream of the T2 gateway. The cell ID can be taken either from the "L1 Frame Information" or the "Individual Addressing (IA)" data. Manual (Cell ID)
Indicates the cell ID that was manually set directly at the transmitter. The value can be changed here. For this setting to be effective, "Source" must be set to "Manual". The cell ID can be changed at any time without the signal being interrupted.
In the case of a feed using the T2 ‑MI interface, "L1" must usually be selected here. For test purposes, the frequency offset can also be set manually. With TS feed, the frequency offset can only be set manually. Manual (L1 Frequency)
Indicates the manually set L1 frequency offset.
Used (L1 Frequency)
Indicates the used frequency offset.
Source (Tx Delay Offset)
Indicates the selected data source for a transmitter ‑specific offset of the time of transmission.
This value can be changed here.
This value is added to the set RF frequency in the "Output" menu of the exciter.
If the T2‑MI interface is used, the value can be either taken from the IA parameters or deactivated. This function is not available if a TS feed is used. Tx Delay Offset (Tx Delay Offset)
Indicates the transmitter ‑specific transmission delay taken from IA parameters, provided that the "Tx Delay Offset" function is activated.
3276.8 µs
"PLP" parameters ●
Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter (TX An or TX B) > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder > PLP Parameters
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
ID
Indicates the ID of the displayed PLP.
0 to 255
Read only
FEC
Indicates the set error correction algorithm (FEC).
16k LDPC, 64k LDPC
Maintenance
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway. PLP Type
Indicates the set PLP type. The setting can be changed here.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Common, Type 1, Maintenance Type 2
56
80/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
No of PLPs
Indicates the number of physical layer pipes (PLPs) present in the data stream.
1 to 16
Read only
Group ID
Indicates the PLP Group within the T2 system to which the displayed physical layer pipe (PLP) is linked.
0 to 255
Maintenance
This value can be changed here. This enables a receiv er to link the data PLP to the corresponding Common PLP that has the same PLP Group ID. FEC Blocks
Indicates the maximum number of FEC Blocks that can be received per 0 to 1023 interleaving frame.
Read only
Time Interleaver Type
Indicates the selected time interleaver type.
Single, Multi
Maintenance
PLP Increment / Decrement
Indicates the selected physical layer pipe (PLP).
Read / write
Payload Type
Indicates the format of the input PLP. Each input PLP can process the following formats: TS (transport stream) ● GSE (generic encapsulated stream) ● GCS (generic continuous stream) ● GCS is a data stream of variable length in which the modulator interface does not know the limits in the data stream. GFPS (generic fixed‑length packetized stream) ● GFPS is a data stream with fixed packet length. This format ensures compatibility with DVB‑S. GSE is the preferred format.
TS, GSE, GCS, GFPS
Read only
Coderate
Indicates the set code rate.
1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6
Maintenance
0 to 255
Maintenance
The following settings are possible here: Single: ● One interleaving frame contains exactly one T2 frame (one or more TI blocks in the interleaving frame). Multi: ● One interleaving frame contains one or more T2 frames (one interleaving frame contains just one TI block).
The desired value can be selected from the PLP list using the increment and decrement buttons.
The code rate is used to set the ratio of information data to . 1/2 provides the greatest error correction and the lowest data transfer rate; 7/8 provides the lowest error correction and the greatest data transfer rate. The setting can be changed here. Time Interleaver Length
Indicates the set time interleaver length. The meaning of this parameter varies depending on the setting under Time Interleaver Type: for Time Interleaver Type = Single: ● Time Interleaver Length indicates the number of TI blocks per interleaving frame. for Time Interleaver Type = Multi: ● Time Interleaver Length indicates the number of T2 frames into which an interleaving frame is divided. The setting can be changed here.
Constellation
Indicates the set modulation mode. This parameter can be changed here. QPSK is extremely fail ‑safe, but has only a low data rate.264QCM can transmit very high data rates and is recommended if few faults are expected on the transmission link.
QPSK, 16QAM, Maintenance 64QAM, 256QAM
The setting can be changed here.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
57
81/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Rotated
Indicates whether rotation is set for the constellation.
No, Yes
Maintenance
Nrm. Efficiency, High Efficiency
Maintenance
If the constellation is rotated, the robustness of the signal to interference increases. The setting can be changed here. Baseband Mode
Indicates the set efficiency. High Efficiency: certain, normally unused bytes in the data stream are used for information data transmission. This mode is not supported by all receiver instruments. The setting can be changed here.
"PAPR / FEF" parameters
The PAPR function is only active if the corresponding software option is installed.
●
Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter (TX An or TX B) > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder > PAPR / FEF
Name
Description
Value range
PAPR Reduction (Peak to Average Power Ratio)
Indicates the selected function for reduction of the crest factor. A corre- No, TR, L1-ACE/ sponding software option must be installed in order to activate this func- P2-TR, L1-ACE/ tion. TR
Access right Maintenance
The following settings are possible here: No ● Only available with DVB T2 version 1.1.1. Switches off crest factor reduction. TR ● Only available with DVB T2 version 1.1.1. Switches on crest factor reduction (peak ‑to‑average power ratio reduction through tone reservation). L1-ACE/P2-TR ● Only available with DVB T2 version > 1.1.1. Minimizes the effect of crest factor reduction by using just one iteration. At the same time, ACE (Active Constellation Extension) is active in the DVB‑T2 coder. L1-ACE/TR ● Only available with DVB T2 version > 1.1.1. Activates crest factor reduction using the settings for "Clipping Threshold" and "Iterations" that are predefined by the DVB‑T2 gateway. At the same time, ACE (Active Constellation Extension) is active in the DVB‑T2 coder. TR Clipping Indicates the limit up to which the PAPR ‑TR algorithm operates. The Variable Threshold (Peak displayed value divided by 100 roughly corresponds to the desired crest to Average Power factor in dB. Ratio)
Read only
TR Iterations Sup- Indicates the maximum number of tone reservation repetitions that are ported (Peak to supported by the currently selected Bandwidth, FFT and Guard Interval Average Power settings. Ratio)
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Variable
58
82/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Iterations Active (Peak to Average
Indicates the number of tone reservation repetitions that are actually performed per symbol.
Variable
Read only
Indicates the number of tone r es erv ation repetitions s ignaled by IA.
0 to 1023
Read only
Power Ratio) TR Iter ations IA
TR Iterations Indicates whether the number of tone reservation repetitions have been No, Yes Reduced (Peak to reduced compared to the number signaled by IA. Average Power Ratio)
Read only
Future Extension Indicates whether future extension frames are used. Frame (Transmission System)
No, Yes
Read only
Type (Transmission System)
Indicates the type of the associated FEF part as a digit.
0 to 15
Read only
Length (Transmission System)
Indicates the length of the used FEF part as the number of periods T from the beginning of the P1 symbol of the FEF part to the beginning of the P1 symbol of the next T2 frame.
0 to 1677215 (= 224‒1)
Read only
Interval (Transmission System)
Indicates the number of T2 frames between two FEF parts.
0 to 255
Read only
"Settings Check" parameters ●
Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter (TX An or TX B) > Exciter > DVB-T2 Coder > Settings Check
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
DVB T2 Configuration
Indicates whether the configuration of the DVB‑T2 parameters is consistent.
Undefined, No, Yes
Read only
Ok, Not ok
Read only
If a fault occurs, a message is output as to whether a fault is present in the settings or the selected configuration is not s upported by this exciter. T2-MI Stream
Indicates whether there is a fault in the T2‑MI stream. A fault is an indication that the modulator settings are inconsistent and are not suitable for the settings that are signaled via the transport stream. First check the signal quality of the T2 ‑MI feed. If this problem persists, contact the Service department.
DVB-T2 Coder Mode
Indicates whether the selected modulation mode is supported by the exciter.
Supported, Not Supported
Read only
Bandwidth
Indicates whether the configuration of the channel bandwidth is consistent. If not, a fault message is output.
Off, No, Yes
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
59
83/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Generate Test Signal
Indicates which test signal is generated. Off ●
Off, PRBS, Mute 1st P1 Symbol
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
● ●
●
Switches off test signal generation. PRBS Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload. Mute 1st P1 Symbol Suppresses the first symbol of each T2 frame. This function can be used to measure the time of signal transmission. Single Carrier Generates an unmodulated single carrier. The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band and therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency. This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out (X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
The selection can be changed here. Testmode
Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the transmitter will not be possible.
4.3.1.2
DVB-T The DVB‑T transmission parameters required for coding and modulation as well as the TPS settings (TPS = transmission parameter signaling) used and signaled during transmission can be checked in the "Configuration" menu field. The DVB‑T standard can be used both in single frequency networks (SFN) and multiple frequency networks (MFN). In SFNs, the transmission signaling parameters (TSP) are usually set automatically by the megaframe information packet (MIP); in MFNs, the TSP parameters are usually set manually. The two variants DVB‑T and DVB‑H are additionally available for both operating modes. In the Localization menu, it is possible to define manually or automatically (via MIP) the SFN cell to which this transmitter is to be assigned. To allow fine adjustment of single‑frequency networks, a time and frequency offset from the data carousel of the MIP can be set individually for each transmitter of the SFN via the central SAN adapter. This is activated by setting Tx Control to "On" and by defining a transmitter address that is unique in the SAN. In the TPS Settings menu, the TPS transmission parameters can be configured manually (only with TPS Source = Manual). The modulation parameters effective in the coder are displayed under "Active TPS Settings" (all operating modes). In the DVB‑H TV standard, a number of other transmission parameters are available. "Configuration" parameters These settings influence the availability of certain parameters in the Modulation menu.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
60
84/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
●
Path: Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DVB-T Coder > Configuration
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
TPS Source (Configuration)
Indicates the source set for the TPS parameters (TPS = transmission parameter signaling).
MIP, Manual
Maintenance
DVB-T, DVB- H
Maintenance
Off, MIP, Manual
Maintenance
0 to FFFF
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
0 to 65535
Maintenance
‒3276.8 µs to
Read only
If a T2‑MI interface is used, this value is fixed by the DVB ‑T2 gateway. Modulation (Configuration)
Indicates the set digital TV standard.
Cell ID Source (Localization)
Indicates the set data source of the cell ID.
Manual Cell ID (Localization)
Indicates a manually set cell ID.
The setting can be changed here.
The setting can be changed here.It is still possible to switch off signaling of the cell ID here.
For the cell ID to become effective, the "Cell ID Source" must be set to "Manual".
Tx Control (Local- Indicates whether Tx control is activated. ization) The setting can be changed here. When control is activated and the transmitter address is set, the cell ID, the frequency offset and the delay offset from the megaframe initialization packet (MIP) are applied. Tx Address (Localization)
Indicates the set transmitter address. Setting the transmitter address is a precondition to reading Tx information (transmitter ‑specific settings) from the megaframe initialization packet (MIP). However, the information is only used if "Tx Control" is activated. The setting can be changed here.
Tx Delay Offset (Localization)
Indicates the number of microseconds by which this transmitter is to shift the time of transmission of its signal relative to other transmitters in the DVB‑T network.
3276.8 µs
This value is set via the megaframe initialization packet (MIP).
"Modulation" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DVB-T Coder > Modulation
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Bandwidth (Man-
Indicates the set channel bandwidth occupied by the DVB‑T signal in the
5 MHz, 6 MHz,
Maintenance
ual TPS Settings)
frequency spectrum. 5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz or 8 MHz can be set. The selected frequency depends on the required bandwidth of the channel to be transmitted.
7 MHz, 8 MHz
FFT Length (Man- Indicates the set FFT length. ual TPS Settings) It corresponds to the number of carriers used. The setting depends on the customer ‑specific decision as to which type of DVB network is to be used.
2K, 4K, 8K
Maintenance
With 2K, the OFDM signal is modeled on 1705 carriers; with 8K, it is modeled on 6817 carriers. The setting "4K" can be selected only for DVB‑H.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
61
85/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Constellation Indicates the set modulation mode. (Manual TPS SetThe following settings are possible here: tings) QPSK is extremely fail‑safe, but has only a low data rate. ● 64QAM can transmit very high data rates if few faults are expected ● on the transmission link. 16QAM is a compromise between the two other setting values. ●
Value range
Access right
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
Maintenance
Coderate (Manual Indicates the set code rate. 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, TPS Settings) 7/8 The code rate is used to set the ratio of information data to . 1/2 provides the greatest error correction and the lowest data transfer rate; 7/8 provides the lowest error correction and the greatest data transfer rate.
Maintenance
Guard Interval Indicates the set guard interval. (Manual TPS SetThe guard interval determines the time span between signals for multitings) carrier modulation, in which no information is transmitted.
1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4
Maintenance
5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Read only
The larger the time span is, the lower the risk of interference to other transmitters and the lower the data transfer rate will be. The setting values are a fraction of the symbol period. Ideally, a value that is larger than the longest echo travel time of the system should be selected. Of all the possible setting values, 1/32 has the greatest risk of interference but also the highest data transfer rate. Bandwidth (Active Indicates the set channel bandwidth occupied by the DVB‑T signal in the TPS Settings) frequency spectrum. FFT Length (Active TPS Settings)
Indicates the set FFT length. (4K is only displayed with DVB ‑H.)
2K, 4K, 8K
Read only
Constellation (Active TPS Settings)
Indicates the set modulation mode.
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
Read only
Coderate (Active TPS Settings)
Indicates the set code rate (ratio of information data to . 7/8
Read only
Guard Interval (Active TPS Settings)
Indicates the set guard interval.
1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4
Read only
Active Cell ID (Active TPS Settings)
Indicates the active cell ID that this transmitter is to use.
0 to FFFF
Read only
TPS Settings (Active TPS Settings)
Indicates whether the TPS settings are consistent.
Ok, Fail
Read only
This value can be set manually (entry field "Configuration > Localization > Manual Cell ID") or automatically (by the SFN adapter).
"Test" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DVB-T Coder > Test
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
62
86/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Generate Test Signal
Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off ● Switches off test signal generation. PRBS ● Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload. Mute 1st P1 Symbol ● Suppresses the first symbol of each T2 frame. This function can be used to measure the time of signal transmission. Single Carrier ● Generates an unmodulated single carrier. The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band and therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency. This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out (X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
Off, PRBS, Mute 1st P1 Symbol, Single Carrier
Maintenance
Off, On
Read only
The selection can be changed here. Testmode
Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated. If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the transmitter will not be possible.
4.3.1.3
ISDB-T
To operate the transmitter in ISDB-T mode, an appropriate software option must be activated using an option code. The ISDB‑T TV standard can be used both in single frequency networks (SFN) and in multiple frequency networks (MFN). In an SFN, the time at which an ISDB ‑T symbol is transmitted is either set automatically via the ISDB-T information packet (IIP) or set statically at each individual transmitter. The network mode is selected in the SFN menu. If an IIP is present in the feed data stream, all TMCC (transmission and multiplexing configuration control) settings should be performed automatically. In this case, "Coder Source" must be set to "IIP". In the case of operation in a static SFN (in which usually no IIP is present), all coder settings can also be performed manually. In this case, "Coder Source" must be set to "Manual". Depending on this switch, the settings in the "Modulation (Manual)" tab are either effective or not effective. The active (effective) TMCC setting of the coder is displayed in the "Modulation (Active)" tab. With manual setting, the display is identical to the TMCC values set in the "Modulation (Manual)" tab. With automatic setting via IIP, the displayed TMCC settings are identical to the values signaled via IIP. In the Localization menu, certain exciter settings can be controlled automatically via IIP. The following functions are supported: ●
Transmitter ‑specific setting of the time of transmission
●
Transmitter ‑specific setting of the SFN module (static / dynamic SFN). In this case, the switch for selecting the SFN module in the SFN menu must be set to "Auto".
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
63
87/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
In order to use this function, an equipment ID that is unique in the network must be set for this exciter.
"Configuration" parameters ● Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ISDB-T Coder > Configuration Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Coder Source (Configuration)
Indicates the selected source for the settings of the TMCC (transmission and multiplexing configuration control) for the ISDB ‑T coder.
Manual, IIP
Maintenance
Off, Active, Automatic
Maintenance
0 to 65535
Maintenance
----, Not Found, No SFN Info, Found
Read only
On, Off
Maintenance
0 to 65535
Maintenance
The following settings can be selected: Manual, i.e. parameters are set in the transmitter ● IIP (ISDB‑T information packets), i.e. parameters are read out of the ● IIP in the transmission TMCC Next (Con- Indicates from where the TMCC ‑NEXT (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control NEXT) parameters are to be retrieved. figuration) The following settings can be selected: If "Active" is set, the settings for TMCC‑NEXT from the currently ● actively set values for TMCC are used. With "Automatic", the TMCC‑NEXT parameters from the ISDB ‑T ● information packet (IIP) are applied, if possible. Otherwise, the currently set values are used. With "Off", TMCC NEXT is not used. ● IIP PID (Localization)
Indicates the packet ID number (PID) that has been set for the ISDB ‑T information packet (IIP) in the input data stream. The setting can be changed here. Requirement: Coder Source must be set to IIP.
IIP Packet (Localization)
Indicates whether or not ISDB‑T information packets with the set IIP ID are present in the transport stream and whether the ISDB-T gateway inserts SFN information into the IIP. Only displayed if "IIP" has been selected as Coder Source.
Equipment Control (Localization)
Activates or deactivates the instrument ID.
Equipment ID (Localization)
A unique instrument ID used for referencing to special settings of the ISDB‑T information packet (IIP).
IIP Time Offset (Localization)
Indicates the time‑of ‑transmission offset signaled for this transmitter via the ISDB‑T information packet (IIP).
Transmitter ‑specific settings can be configured via the ISDB ‑T information packet present in the transport stream.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Read only
64
88/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
IIP SFN Mode (Localization)
Indicates the selected network mode.
● ●
Frame Counter (Localization)
The following modes can be selected: Off (Multiple Frequency Networks) ● ● Dynamic SFN (Single Frequency Network): The time of transmis● ● sion of all transmitters in the network is predetermined centrally via an SFN adapter. Static SFN: The time of transmission is preset individually at each ● transmitter. ● Auto (via IIP): The SFN mode and time of transmission are predetermined automatically via an SFN adapter. Indicates whether the number of incoming transport stream packets (TSP) per multiplex frame corresponds to the settings or the information read out from the ISDB-T information packet (IIP).
Off (MFN) Dynamic
Access right Maintenance
(SFN) Static (SFN) Auto (via IIP)
Ok, Warning
Read only
A warning occurs if individual TSPs in the signal feed have been changed or are lost. In this case, the exciter will mute briefly.
"Modulation (Manual)" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ISDN-T Coder > Modulation (Manual)
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Bandwidth (Common IIP Settings)
Indicates the channel bandwidth occupied by the ISDB‑T signal in the frequency spectrum.
6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Configuration
6 MHz, 7 MHz or 8 MHz can be s et. The selected frequency depends on the required bandwidth of the channel to be transmitted. Partial Reception Indicates whether "Partial Reception" is switched on. Off, On (Common IIP SetIf layer A for mobile reception is to be used (1 ‑segment receiver), "Partial tings) Reception" must be set to "On". In this case, segment 0 is positioned in the band center.
Maintenance
The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT (transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC NEXT is set to "Manual". FFT Length Indicates the set FFT length. (Common IIP SetThe following values can be set here: tings) Mode 1 (2K): 2048 carriers ● Mode 2 (4K): 4096 carriers ● Mode 3 (8K): 8192 carriers ●
2K (Mode 1), 4K (Mode 2), 8K (Mode 3)
Maintenance
Guard Interval (Common IIP Set- Indicates the set guard interval. The guard interval determines the time span between signals for multitings) carrier modulation in which no information is transmitted. The larger the time span is, the lower the risk of interference and the lower the data transfer rate will be.
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
Maintenance
The setting values are a fraction of the symbol period. Ideally, a value that is larger than the channel spread should be selected. With 1/32, the risk of interference is highest but the data transfer rate is also highest. The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT (transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC NEXT is set to "Manual".
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
65
89/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Segments (Layer A, B, C)
Indicates the number of segments used for the respective layer.
0 to 13
Maintenance
Constellation (Layer A, B, C)
Indicates the set modulation mode.
DQPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
Maintenance
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Maintenance
The distribution of segments between the layers is subject to various conditions: 0: A layer is deactivated. ● For layer A, 0 is not permitted. For layer B, 0 is possible only if layer C also has 0 segments. The sum of segments from all active layers must always be 13. ● The segments can be distributed between 1, 2 or 3 layers. ● The assignment of 1 single segment is only possible for layer A. ● Partial reception must be activated in this case (Partial Reception = On). The remaining 12 segments can be distributed between the layers B and C in accordance with the above ‑mentioned rules.
The following modulation modes can be selected: QPSK is extremely fail‑safe, but has only a low data rate. ● 64QAM can transmit very high data rates if few faults are expected ● on the transmission link. 16QAM is a compromise between the two other setting values. ● The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT (transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC NEXT is set to "Manual".
Coderate (Layer A, B, C)
Indicates the set code rate. The code rate is used to set the ratio of information data to . 1/2 provides the greatest error correction; 7/8 provides the greatest data transfer rate. The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT (transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC NEXT is set to "Manual".
Interleaver (Layer Indicates the selected conversion length of the time interleaver. A, B, C) To reduce the susceptibility to faults when there is noise, the time interleaver converts the information data in a data block.
0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 Maintenance
0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32 can be selected as conversion length. 0 means that no conversion takes place; 32 corresponds to the highest degree of conversion. This provides the greatest protection, but also the greatest latency. The value can be entered manually and is used for TMCC NEXT (transmission and multiplexing configuration control NEXT) if TMCC NEXT is set to "Manual". Configuration (Status)
Indicates whether the set ISDB‑T configuration is consistent and valid over all three layers.
Valid, Invalid
Read only
If a fault is indicated, it must be checked whether the sum of all segments over the three layers is exactly 13.
"Modulation (Active)" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ISDB-T Coder > Modulation (Active)
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
66
90/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Bandwidth (Common IIP Settings)
Indicates the set channel bandwidth occupied by the ISDB ‑T signal in the frequency spectrum.
5 MHz, 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 MHz
Read only
Partial Reception Indicates whether Partial Reception is switched on or off. (Common IIP Settings)
Off, On
Read only
FFT Length Indicates the set FFT length. (Common IIP Settings)
2K (Mode 1), 4K (Mode 2), 8K (Mode 3)
Read only
Guard Interval Indicates the set guard interval. (Common IIP Settings)
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
Read only
Segments (Layer A, B, C)
Indicates the number of segments set for the respective layer.
0 to 13
Read only
Constellation (Layer A, B, C)
Indicates the set modulation mode.
DQPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
Read only
Coderate (Layer A, B, C)
Indicates the set code rate.
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Read only
Interleaver (Layer Indicates the set conv ers ion length of the time interleaver. A, B, C) Configuration (Status)
Indicates whether the set ISDB‑T configuration is consistent and valid over all three layers.
0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 Read only
Valid, Invalid
Read only
If a fault is indicated, it must be checked whether the sum of all segments over the three layers is exactly 13.
"Test" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ISDB-T Coder > Test
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
67
91/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Generate Test Signal
Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off, Testmode 0, Off Testmode 1 ● Switches off test signal generation. Testmode 0 ● Activates a test sequence with three layers, ISDB‑T mode 1 and guard interval 1/4 - Layer A: 1 segment, DQPSK, c ode rate 1/2, time interleaver: 0 - Layer B: 7 segments, 16QAM, code rate 7/8, time interleaver: 0 - Layer C: 5 segments, 64QAM, code rate 2/3, time interleaver: 0. Testmode 1 ● Activates a test sequence with one layer, ISDB‑T mode 1 and guard interval 1/4: - Layer A: 13 segments, QPSK, code rate 1/2, time interleaver: 0; "IFFT PRBS Band": Activates a PRBS test sequence with a bandwidth of 5.57 MHz Single Carrier ● Generates an unmodulated single carrier. The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band and
Access right Maintenance
therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency. This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out (X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open. Testmode
Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated.
Off, On
Maintenance
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the transmitter will not be possible.
4.3.1.4
ATSC
To operate the transmitter in ATSC mode, an appropriate software option must be activated using an option code.
The ATSC TV standard can be used both in single frequency networks (SFN) and in multiple frequency networks (MFN). In an SFN, the time at which an ATSC symbol is transmitted is set automatically via the transmission control protocol (TCP). The network mode is selected in the SFN menu. Whether a TCP is present in the data stream is indicated in the two Input menus. In the Configuration menu, it is possible to activate transmission to mobile terminal equipment and also to set the transmitter IDs for operation in a network. "Configuration" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATSC Coder > Configuration
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
68
92/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Mobile DTV (Configuration)
Indicates whether the coding for Mobile DTV is switched on or off.
Off, On
Maintenance
MHE PID (Configuration)
Indicates which MHE PID is set.
0 to 8191
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here. The packet ID that is set is the one containing the Mobile DTV data stream. The MHE PID is only available if Mobile DTV has been set to "On".
Frame Status (Configuration)
Indicates whether the ATSC coder is synchronized using the TCP frames contained in the data stream.
Locked, Unlocked Read only
A fault can occur if the fed transport stream does not contain a TCP. In this case, the status display of the active input would signal a corresponding TCP fault. Mobile Content (Configuration)
Indicates whether mobile data is contained in the input data stream.
Found, Not found
Read only
RF Watermark (Localization)
Indicates the set RF watermark level.
‒21 dB to ‒39 dB Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.
in steps of 3 dB, Off
This display is only available if Mobile DTV has been set to "On".
It is the level of the RF watermark signal relative to the useful signal. If "Off" is set, no RF watermark signal is generated. The RF watermark allows a distinction to be made between the RF signals of individual transmitters in single‑frequency networks for measuring purposes. To enable this, the transmitter ID, for example, is transmitted cyclically in the watermark. Network ID (Local- Indicates the set network ID. ization) The setting can be changed here.
0 to 495
Maintenance
0 to 31
Maintenance
Using the network ID, several transmitters in a single‑frequency network can be combined to form a group. All the transmitters in a group must be assigned different Tx addresses. Tx Address (Local- Indicates the set transmitter address. ization) The setting can be changed here. The transmitter address allows a distinction to be made between the individual transmitters in a single‑frequency network.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
69
93/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
"Test" parameters Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Generate Test Signal
Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off ● Switches off test signal generation. PRBS ● Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload. Single Carrier ● Generates an unmodulated single carrier. The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band and therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency. This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out (X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
Off, PRBS, Single Maintenance Carrier
The setting can be changed here. Testmode
Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated.
Off, On
Read only
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the transmitter will not be possible.
4.3.1.5
DAB
To operate the transmitter in DAB mode, an appropriate software option must be activated using an option code.
"Config" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DAB Coder > Config
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Source (DAB Mode)
Indicates the DAB mode source.
Manual, ETI (LI)MID
Maintenance
Manual, ETI
Read only
I, II, III, IV
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here. Manual ● DAB mode is set manually at the transmitter. ●
Source Active (DAB Mode)
ETI (LI)-MID DAB mode is read out from the ETI header.
Indicates the source from which the DAB mode setting is retrieved.
Mode (DAB Mode) Indicates which DAB mode has been manually preselected. The setting can be changed here. Mode ETI(LI)-MId (DAB Mode)
Indicates which DAB mode is signaled via the ETI header in the data stream.
I, II, III, IV
Read only
Mode Active (DAB Mode)
Indicates the currently active DAB mode.
I, II, III, IV
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
70
94/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
"ASS TII" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DAB Coder > ASS TII
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Tx Address (ASS Type 0)
Indicates the transmitter address transmitted in the ASS (Asynchronous Signaling).
0 to 65535
Maintenance
Using the transmitter address, it is possible to activate settings from the TII via the DAB multiplexer individually for each transmitter. The setting can be changed here. Required (ASS Type 0)
Depending on the setting for TII Source, indicates whether the Tx address is evaluated.
Yes, No
Read only
Present (ASS Type 0)
Indicates whether transmitter identification information (TII) for the set transmitter address is contained in the transport stream.
Yes, No
Read only
State (ASS Type 0)
Indicates whether the Tx address is required or present. Not Required, Not Required Never Seen, ● The Tx address is not evaluated. Holdover, OK Never Seen ● No Tx address has been found in the data stream. The main ID and sub-ID are set to 0 and no additional Tx time offset is set. Holdover ● The data stream does not currently contain a Tx address. The TII last found is sent. OK ● TII for the set Tx address is present in the data stream.
Read only
TII Source (TII)
Indicates the source from which the identifiers of the TII (transmission identification information) settings are to be retrieved.
Off, Manual, MNSC
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here. ●
Off No TII settings are to be used.
●
Manual The main ID and sub ‑ID are to be set manually.
●
MNSC The main ID and sub ‑ID are to be retrieved from the MNSC (multiplex network service channel) data .
Source Active (TII)
Indicates which source has been selected for the identifiers of the TII (transmission identification information) settings.
Off, Manual, MNSC
Read only
Main ID (TII)
Indicates the set main ID.
0 to 69
Maintenance
The main ID can be used for identifying all transmitters belonging to a DAB cell.
(0 to 5 with DAB mode III)
The setting can be changed here. With DAB mode III, the permissible value range is 0 to 5. MAIN ID MNSC (TII)
Indicates the main ID signaled via MNSC (multiplex network service channel).
0 to 69
Read only
Main ID Active (TII)
Indicates the main ID effective in the exciter.
0 to 69
Read only
Main ID State (TII) Indicates whether the main ID set in the exciter is valid.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Off, Out of Range, Read only OK
71
95/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Sub ID (TII)
Indicates the set sub‑ID.
0 to 31
Maintenance
The sub‑ID can be used to distinguish between the transmitters within a DAB cell. The setting can be changed here. Sub ID MNSC (TII)
Indicates the sub‑ID signaled via MNSC (multiplex network service chan- 0 to 31 nel).
Sub ID Active (TII) Indicates the sub-ID effective in the exciter.
0 to 31
Read only
Read only
"Test" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > DAB Coder > Test
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Generate Test Signal
Indicates which test signal is to be generated. Off ● Switches off test signal generation. PRBS ● Generates a PRBS sequence instead of the payload. Single Carrier ● Generates an unmodulated single carrier. The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band and therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency. This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out (X60) must be removed. In order to protect the amplifiers, this test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open.
Off, PRBS, Single Maintenance Carrier
The setting can be changed here. Testmode
Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated.
Off, On
Read only
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the transmitter will not be possible.
4.3.1.6
ATV The basic configuration for analog TV transmission is set up in the Coder Config menu. Parameters such as the analog substandard as well as the transmission of sound with or without NICAM modulation are selected here. The settings and display values shown in the various submenus of the exciter depend on the configuration selected here. "Input Video" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Input Video
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
72
96/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Nominal Input Amplitude (Control)
Indicates the set video input amplitude.
0.7 V pp or 1.0 V pp (for 75 Ω)
Maintenance
Force Exciter Changeover (Control)
Used to determine whether switchover to another redundant exciter is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and n+1). In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the higher ‑level redundancy control unit, which decides whether to switch over to another exciter or transmitter. In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
No (Create Warn- Maintenance ing), Yes (Create Fault)
Clipping (Status)
Indicates the status of possible video input signal clipping.
NO CLIPPING, Read only NO HEADROOM, CLIPPING
The setting can be changed here.
The following displays (with color signalization) are possible: NO CLIPPING (green) ● The video input signal is within the valid range.
Sync. Monitoring (Status)
●
NO HEADROOM (yellow)
●
The video input signal is just off a clipping boundary. CLIPPING (red) The video input signal is clipped.
Indicates the status of sync ‑pulse monitoring of the input signal. The following displays are possible: OK ● A standard‑compliant input signal is being applied. ●
No V No V‑pulse frame is detected.
●
no H+V: No V‑pulse or H‑pulse frame is detected.
●
Low Level The sync‑pulse amplitude is less than 50 % of the nominal sync‑pulse amplitude; the processed signal is, however, available at the encoder output.
White Amplitude Input (Status)
Indicates the measured value for white input amplitude.
Sync. Amplitude Input (Status)
Indicates the measured input amplitude of the sync pulse.
OK, no V, no H+V, Low Level
Read only
0 V to 1.3 V
Read only
0 V to 0.6 V
Read only
If the selected scanning line is not found in the input signal, the measurement value 0 mV is displayed.
"Input AF 1" parameters
The NICAM function is only active if the corresponding software option is installed.
●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Input AF 1
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Nominal Input Level (FM Input)
Indicates the set input level at the FM sound modulator for AF signal AF1.
‒12 dBµ to
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.
12 dBμ
Current Input Level (FM Input)
Indicates the current input level at the FM sound modulator for AF signal AF1 (as a percentage of the maximum drive level).
0 % to 100 %
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Read only
73
97/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Clipping (FM Input)
Indicates the status of possible clipping of AF input signal AF1.
NO CLIPPING, CLIPPING
Read only
‒6 dB to 6 dB
Maintenance
0 % to 100 %
Read only
NO CLIPPING, CLIPPING
Read only
The following displays (with color signalization) are possible: NO CLIPPING (green) ● AF input signal AF1 is within the valid range. ●
Gain Adjustment (Nicam Input)
CLIPPING (red) AF input signal AF1 is clipped because it has exceeded the maximum permissible input level.
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is set to "Coder". Indicates the gain of the AF signal for the input of the NICAM coder. The displayed value is relative to "Nominal Input Level". The setting can be changed here for matching purposes.
Current Input Level (Nicam
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is set to "Coder".
Input)
Indicates the current input level at the NICAM coder for AF signal AF1 (as a percentage of the maximum drive level).
Clipping (Nicam Input)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is set to "Coder". Indicates the status of possible clipping of NICAM input signal AF1. The following displays (with color signalization) are possible: NO CLIPPING (green) ● NICAM input signal AF1 is within the valid range. CLIPPING (red) NICAM input signal AF1 is clipped because it has exceeded the maximum permissible input level.
●
"Input AF 2" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Input AF 2
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Nominal Input Level (FM Input)
Indicates the set input level at the FM sound modulator for AF signal AF2.
‒12 dBμ to
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.
12 dBμ
Current Input Level (FM Input)
Indicates the current input level at the FM sound modulator for AF signal AF2 (as a percentage of the maximum drive level).
0 % to 100 %
Read only
Clipping (FM Input)
Indicates the status of possible clipping of AF input signal AF2.
NO CLIPPING, CLIPPING
Read only
‒6 dB to 6 dB
Maintenance
The following displays (with color signalization) are possible: NO CLIPPING (green) ● AF input signal AF2 is within the valid range. ●
Gain Adjustment (Nicam Input)
CLIPPING (red) AF input signal AF2 is clipped because it has exceeded the maximum permissible input level.
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is set to "Coder". Indicates the set input level for the NICAM signal that is fed to the integrated NICAM coder. The setting can be changed here for matching purposes.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
74
98/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Current Input Level (Nicam
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is set to "Coder".
0 % to 100 %
Read only
Input)
Indicates the current input level at the NICAM coder for AF signal AF2 (as a percentage of the maximum drive level).
Clipping (Nicam Input)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is set to "Coder".
NO CLIPPING, CLIPPING
Read only
Indicates the status of possible clipping of NICAM input signal AF2. The following displays (with color signalization) are possible: NO CLIPPING (green) ● NICAM input signal AF2 is within the valid range. CLIPPING (red) NICAM input signal AF2 is clipped because it has exceeded the maximum permissible input level.
●
"Input Nicam" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Input Nicam
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Nicam 728 Datastream (Nicam Input)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "NicamMode" is set to "Modulator".
OK, Not Found
Read only
Indicates whether a NICAM 728 data stream is present.
"White Control" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Video Coder > White Control
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Regulation (Control)
Switches white amplitude regulation on/off. With regulation switched off, the gain value set under Manual Gain is always used. With regulation switched on, the gain is regulated to the level of the test line set under Gain Source. If this test line is not found in the input signal, either the Manual Gain value or the Stored Gain value is used (depending on the setting under Fallback Gain Source).
Off, On
Maintenance
None, OK, < –40 %, < –30 %, > +30
Read only
The setting can be changed here. White Pulse Monitoring (Control)
Indicates the white pulse status signaled by the white pulse monitoring: NONE ● ● ●
Fallback Gain Source (Control)
The test line with the white pulse has not been found. OK The white pulse has been found and the level is OK.
%, > +40 %
The white pulse level is below/above the warning or fault threshold. The warning threshold is ±30 %; the fault threshold is ±40 %.
Used to select whether the manually set gain value (Manual) or the gain Manual, Memory value last active (Memory) is to be used if the test line fails.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Maintenance
75
99/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Current Gain Source (Control)
Indicates the current source for video gain: Manual ●
Manual, Memory, Read only Automatic Control
Manual setting. The setting value is the gain of the control element as a percentage referenced to gain 1. ●
Memory Saved setting. The gain uses the most recently saved value for white control.
●
Automatic Control The gain is controlled by the white control.
White Amplitude Input (Control)
Indicates the measured value for white ‑pulse input amplitude.
0 V to 1.3 V
Read only
White Amplitude Output (Control)
Indicates the measured value for white ‑pulse output amplitude.
0 V to 1.1 V
Read only
Testline (Gain
Indicates the selected test line for the white pulse.
16 to 22
Maintenance
Source)
The setting can be changed here.
Field
Indicates whether the fir st or sec ond field has been s elected for the white First, Second pulse.
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here. Manual Gain (Gain Source)
Indicates the manually set value for video gain. The setting value is the gain of the control element as a percentage, referenced to gain "1".
‒10.0 % to 10.0 % Maintenance
The setting can be changed here. Stored Gain (Gain Indicates the gain set by the white ‑pulse control, referenced to gain "1". Source) If the selected test line fails, this gain value becomes active if "Memory" has been selected as the fallback gain source.
‒50 % to 50 %
Read only
Limiter (White Limiter)
Indicates whether the white limiter is switched on or off. The setting can be changed here.
Off, On
Maintenance
Threshold (White Limiter)
Indicates the set threshold value for the white limiter.
90 % to 120 %
Maintenance
Status (White Limiter)
Indicates whether the white limiter has triggered.
Not Limited, Limited
Read only
The setting can be changed here.
"Equalizer" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Video Coder > Equalizer
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Pre-Equalization (Receiver PreEqualization)
Indicates whether receiver pre‑equalization is switched on.
Off, On
Maintenance
Receiver pre‑equalization can be switched on or off here.
"Config" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Audio Coder > Config
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
76
100/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Coder Mode (FM Audio)
Indicates the set audio mode.
Off, Mono, Stereo, Dual, Auto (Dataline)
Maintenance
The settings have a special meaning: Off ● following Dual‑sound is set as the audio mode. ●
Mono The two AF input signals are combined to produce one mono signal.
●
Stereo The two AF input signals contain the left and right channel of a stereo signal.
●
Dual The two AF input signals provide independent audio information for dual‑sound mode.
●
Auto (Dataline) The audio mode is read out from the audio data line present in the picture signal.
The setting can be changed here. Dataline Info (FM Audio)
Indicates the audio mode signaling present in the audio data line. (N/A means that there is no signaling in the selected audio data line.)
N/A, Mono, Stereo, Dual
Read only
Current Audio Mode (FM Audio)
Indicates the current audio mode.
Mono, Stereo, Dual
Read only
Dataline (FM Audio)
Indicates the current audio data line.
10 to 22
Maintenance
Pilot Deviation (FM Audio)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off".
Read only
Indicates the current FM deviation for the pilot signal.
0 Hz to ±25000 Hz
Pilot Gain (FM Audio)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off".
‒19.0 dB to ‒
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.
Indicates the selected level for the pilot signal.
12.0 dB
The setting can be changed here. Pre-Emphasis (FM Filter)
Indicates whether pre-emphasis for FM sound is switched on (50 μs or 75 μs).
Off, On
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
±50000 Hz to ±250000 Hz
Maintenance
±50000 Hz to ±120000 Hz
Maintenance
Pre-emphasis can be switched on and off here. Lowpass (FM Filter)
Indicates whether a lowpass filter for FM sound is switched on.
Deviation Limiter (Deviation Limiter)
Indicates whether the deviation limiter for the FM sound subcarrier is switched on.
Warning Above (Deviation Limiter)
Indicates the set threshold at which the deviation limiter warning is activated. In most cases, it is recommendable for Limiter Threshold and Warning Above to have the same value.
The lowpass filter can be switched on and off here.
The deviation limiter can be switched on and off here.
The setting can be changed here. Threshold (Devia- Indicates the set threshold at which the deviation limiter is triggered. tion Limiter) The setting can be changed here.
"Carrier1" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Audio Coder > Carrier1
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
77
101/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Current Deviation (Sound Carrier 1)
Indicates the value of the current FM deviation for sound subcarrier 1.
0 Hz to 25000 Hz
Read only
Nominal Deviation (Sound Carrier 1)
Indicates the preset value for the FM deviation of sound subcarrier 1.
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.
±20000 Hz to ±75000 Hz
Limiter (Sound Carrier 1)
Indicates whether the deviation limiter for sound subcarrier 1 has triggered.
Not Limited, Limited
Read only
"Carrier2" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Audio Coder > Carrier2
Only displayed if "Sound Carrier" is set to "Dual Carrier". Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Current Deviation (Sound Carrier 2)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off".
0 Hz to ±250000 Hz
Read only
Nominal Deviation (Sound Carrier 2)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off".
±20000 Hz to ±75000 Hz
Maintenance
Not Limited, Limited
Read only
Equal FM, Mono Data, Stereo, Dual
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
Indicates the value of the current FM deviation for sound subcarrier 2.
Indicates the preset value for the FM deviation of sound subcarrier 2. The setting can be changed here.
Limiter (Sound Carrier 2)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off".
Nicam Audio Mode (Nicam)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is set to "Coder".
Indicates whether the deviation limiter for sound subcarrier 2 has triggered.
Indicates the NICAM audio mode. Equal FM Audio Mode ● The NICAM audio mode depends on the FM audio mode. Mono/Data, Stereo and Dual Sound ● The NICAM audio mode is determined irrespectiv e of the FM channel. Coding is performed in accordance with the NICAM specifications. The setting can be changed here. Preemphasis (Nicam)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On" and "Nicam Mode" is set to "Coder". Indicates whether the pre-emphasis required by the TV standard is switched on or off for NICAM sound. The setting can be changed here.
Reserve Sound Flag (Nicam)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "On". Indicates whether or not the receiver is to use the sound from sound subcarrier 1 if the NICAM signal fails. The setting can be changed here. "Reserve Sound Flag" should be set to "On" if audio carrier 1 transmits the same sound signal (in mono) as the NICAM carrier. If different information is transmitted on audio carrier 1 than on the NICAM carrier, "Reserve Sound Flag" should be set to "Off".
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
78
102/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
"Coder Config" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Coder Config > Coder Config
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
TV Standard (General Settings)
Indicates the set TV standard.
B, G, D/K, I, I1, K1 Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.
Vision/Sound Indicates the set value for sound subcarrier level 1 referenced to the peak ‒15.0 dB to ‒ Carrier 1 (General envelope power of the vision carrier. 5.0 dB Settings) The setting can be changed here.
Maintenance
Vision/Sound Indicates the set value for sound subcarrier level 2 referenced to the peak ‒27.0 dB to ‒ Carrier 2 (General envelope power of the vision carrier. 17.0 dB Settings) The setting can be changed here.
Maintenance
Residual Carrier (General Settings)
Indicates the set value for the residual carrier.
Maintenance
Channel Bandwidth
Indicates the used channel bandwidth. The channel bandwidth depends 6 MHz, 7 MHz, 8 on the set TV standard. MHz
Read only
Sound Carrier (Audio)
Indicates the selected number of sound subcarriers (for standards B, G, D/K, I, I1, K1).
Single Carrier, Dual Carrier
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
Coder, Modulator
Maintenance
8 % to 25 %
The setting can be changed here.
The following settings are possible here: Single Carrier = one sound subcarrier ● ● Nicam (Audio)
Dual Carrier = two sound subcarriers
Indicates whether NICAM mode has been selected. The setting can be changed here.
Nicam Mode (Audio)
Can only be set if "Nicam" is set to "On". Indicates the selected NICAM mode (for standards B, G, D/K, I, I1). The following settings are possible here: Coder ● AF signal feed of AF1 and AF2 via the inputs AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 as well as coding and modulation in the transmitter. ●
Modulation Signal feed as NICAM 728 data stream via the NICAM DATA digital input.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
79
103/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Input Impedance (Audio)
Indicates the set value for the impedance of inputs AF 1 and AF 2.
600 Ω, High
Maintenance
Nicam Roll-off (Audio)
Can only be set if "Nicam" is set to "On".
The setting can be changed here. Auto, 40 %, 100 % Maintenance
Indicates the setting selected for the NICAM rolloff (for standards B, G, D/K, I, I1). The following settings are possible here: ● Auto NICAM rolloff is automatically set according to the selected TV standard and in compliance with the NICAM specifications (recommended setting!). ●
40 % Manual setting of the NICAM rolloff.
●
100 % Manual setting of the NICAM rolloff.
"Coder Test" parameters ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > ATV Coder > Coder Config > Coder Test
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Testmode (Status)
Indicates whether one of the test signals is activated.
Off, On
Read only
Single Carrier (Video)
Indicates whether an unmodulated single carrier has been activated.
Off, On
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
On, Carrier Off, Modulation Off
Maintenance
If a test signal is activated, decoding of the transmitted signal by the transmitter will not be possible.
The frequency of the single carrier is at the center of the band and therefore deviates from the vision carrier frequency. This test signal can be used to measure the phase noise of the synthesizer. The phase noise must be measured via the RF Monitor Out connector (X61). The cable connected to RF Out (X60) must be removed and this switch must be set to "On". In order to protect the amplifiers, this test signal is only generated if the output of the exciter is open. The setting can be changed here. Pilot (FM)
Only displayed if "Nicam" is set to "Off". Indicates whether the pilot signal is switched on or off. The setting can be changed here.
Sound Mode Carrier 1 (FM)
Indicates the mode setting for FM sound subcarrier 1. The following settings are possible here: Carrier OFF ● Switches off sound subcarrier 1. ●
Modulation OFF Switches on sound subcarrier 1 without modulation.
●
ON Switches on sound subcarrier 1 with modulation.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
80
104/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Sound Mode Carrier 2 (FM)
Indicates the mode setting for FM sound subcarrier 2.
On, Carrier Off, Modulation Off
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
Carrier Off, Modulation Off, On
Maintenance
PRBS Insertion (Nicam)
The following settings are possible here: Carrier OFF ● Switches off sound subcarrier 2. ●
Modulation OFF Switches on sound subcarrier 2 without modulation.
●
ON Switches on sound subcarrier 2 with modulation.
Indicates whether the PRBS for the NICAM carrier is activated or deactivated. The setting can be changed here.
Sound Mode (Nicam)
4.3.2
Indicates the mode setting for the NICAM sound subcarrier. The following settings are possible here: Carrier OFF ● Switches off the sound subcarrier. ●
Modulation OFF Switches on the sound subcarrier without modulation
●
ON Switches on the sound subcarrier with modulation.
Setting Transmit Frequency and Output Power The transmit frequency is set separately for each TCE900 exciter with an accuracy of ± 1 Hz. For the DVB‑T and DVB‑T2 transmission standards, the channel center frequency must be set during this process. The output power of the TCE900 exciter is regulated internally to +13 dBm. It can be attenuated via an integrated attenuator by up to 9 dB (in steps of 3 dB). In high‑power and medium‑power transmitters with only one amplifier, an attenuation of 9 dB must be set. In systems with more than one amplifier, an attenuation of 0 dB must be set. The transmit frequency and output power are configured in the following way: ► Using the menu bar, navigate to the following: "Devices" > "Tx" > "Exciter A | B" > "Output"
4.3.3
Signal Feed The TCE900 exciter has a number of physical inputs depending on the modules and software options installed. Up to two of these inputs can be used parallel to each other for signal feed. They are referred to below as logical inputs. The assignment of physical inputs to logical inputs takes place in a special task during startup of the system. All available physical inputs can also be configured within this task. In normal operation, the two selected logical inputs are visible in the Device View of the exciter. All settings rele-
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
81
105/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
vant for the logical inputs can be made directly in the Device View. The two logical inputs are available for automatic input switchover in the event of a fault along the feed path.
4.3.3.1
Configuring Physical Inputs The physical inputs are configured at startup of the system in the menu "Device View" > "Tx" > "Exciter A | B" > "Task View" > "Configure Inputs". This function defines two logical inputs from the number of available inputs used for the redundancy of the input signal. For each logical input, a name can be optionally assigned for the fed program multiplex. This name is displayed in the transmitter and system overview screens. TS Feed Every exciter which is and suitable forThe the data transmission of digital TV has two transport streamTCE900 inputs (connector X20 X21). format (ASI/SMPTE/Auto) can be set separately for both inputs. The gross data rate and the packet length are also displayed. IP Feed Depending on the installed software options, up to two independent IP feeds are available in the TCE900 exciter. During startup, each Ethernet socket (X30, X31) must be assigned an IP address in the menu "Device View" > "Tx" > "Exciter A | B" > "Task View" > "Configure TS LAN". The two Ethernet sockets are linked to two logical IP streams which contain additional configuration parameters. Both IP streams support unicast and multicast streams. For multicast streams, the IP address of the multiplexer which makes the stream available in the network must also be specified. It is possible to assign both logical IP streams to the same physical socket, but to specify different multicast addresses. This provides maximum flexibility with regard to different redundancy scenarios in the feed path. The IP addresses for the Ethernet sockets are configured in the "Configure TS LAN" task and only become effective after the TCE900 exciter has been restarted.
Settings for Input 1/2 (Transport Stream and IP Stream) "Transport Stream (TS 1/2)" parameters GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Stream Status
Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed Ok, No to the transmitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If Stream a fault is displayed here, first c heck the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE).
Packet Length
Indicates the detected packet length of the transport stream.
Read only
Gross Datarate
Indicates the total data rate on the IP feed.
1200000 bps
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Value range
Value access Read only
82
106/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Payload Datarate
Indicates the information data rate without stuffing bytes on the TS feed. This value is only available if MFN is set
Value access Read only
(multiple‑frequency network), i.e. SFN mode (single ‑frequency network) must be set to OFF. Multiplex Name
A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview and, in the case of n+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switchover function.
<20 characters>
Read / write
Value range
Value access
"IP Stream (IP 1/2)" parameters GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Stream Status (Status)
Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the Ok, No transmitter via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated, check Stream the settings of the IP stream and the Ethernet interface.
Packet Length (Status)
Indicates the detected packet length of the IP stream.
Read only
Read only
Gross Datarate (Status) Indicates the total data rate (gross data rate) on the IP feed.
1200000 bps
Read only
Payload Datarate (Status)
Indicates the information data rate of the multiplex contained in the IP stream.
Read only
RJ45 Connector (Settings)
Used to define the physical network interface to which TS LAN1, TS LAN2 the logical IP stream is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1 socket (X30) is coupled to IP stream 1 and the TS LAN 2 socket (X31) to IP stream 2. This allows the use of several redundant servers that can be selected automat-
Maintenance
ically using the automatic input signal switchover function. However, it is also possible to feed several multicast streams via the same physical Ethernet socket. In this case, too, the automatic input signal switchover function can toggle automatically between two data streams. Protocol (Settings)
Used to select the used network protocol. UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy, connec● tionless communication. RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet ‑ori● ented communication.
Auto, UDP, RTP
Maintenance
Streaming Mode (Settings)
Used to set the used type of network streaming. Unicast: The multiplexer sends the suitable IP ● stream to the IP address of the TV transmitter.
Multicast, Unicast
Maintenance
Maintenance
●
Multicast: The TV subscribes tomultia multicast IP stream thattransmitter can be provided by the plexer in the feed network to several transmitters at the same time.
Port (Settings)
Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is expected.
0 to 65535
IP Address (Settings)
Used to set the IP address ... .
Multiplex Name (Settings)
A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview and, in the case of n+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switchover function.
<20 characters>
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Read / write
83
107/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
"Settings" parameters GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Mute on Input Fail (Input Control of Input 1 / Input 2)
Used to determine whether the output signal of the No, Yes exciter is to be shut down if the input signal of all available inputs fails, or whether "null packets" are to be sent. This switch is available in multiple ‑frequency networks (MFN) only. In single‑frequency networks (SFN), the exciter will always mute if no decodable input signal is fed.
Read / write
Input Fail Delay (Input Control of Input 1 / Input 2)
Used to set the length of the checkout time which must 0 s to 600 s expire after detection of an input signal fault before the exciter displays a fault. If a short checkout time is set, the system can quickly switch over to a standby exciter if all input signals of the exciter fail. If a long checkout time is set, there will be enough time in the event of a fault to switch to an alternative feed path so that the exciter is prevented from switching over to a redundancy component.
Read / write
Force Exciter Changeover (On loss Of Input Signal)
Used to determine whether switchover to another redundant exciter is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and n+1).In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the higher ‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to switch over to another exciter or transmitter. In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
Read / write
No (Create Warning), Yes (Create Fault)
Value access
"Task View Config" parameters "Device View" > "Tx" > "Exciter A | B" > "Task View" > "Configure Inputs" > "Config" GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Value access
Logical Input 1/2
Used to configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, independently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The selection options for the data sources are determined by the installed input interfaces and option keys.
Variable
Maintenance
Multiplex 1/2 Name
A name for the multiplex contained in the transport stream can be entered here. This name is displayed in the transmitter overview and, in the case of N+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter switchover function.
Maintenance
Monitor Out
For measuring purposes, any input signal can be switched to the TS Monitor-Out socket (X22). The selection options for the data sources are determined by the installed input interfaces and option keys.
Maintenance
IP MUX 1/2
Indicates whether a valid data stream is being fed to the Stream OK, transmitter via the IP feed. If a fault is indicated, check No Stream the settings of the IP stream and the Ethernet interface.
Query
"Task View TS Feed" parameters "Device View" > "Tx" > "Exciter A | B" > "Task View" > "Configure Inputs" > "TS Feed" or: "Device View" > "Tx" > "Exciter A | B" > "Input 1 | 2" > "Transport Stream"
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
84
108/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
TS 1/2 Type
Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20 Auto, ASI, and X21. SMPTE ● Auto: The data format is detected automatically ● ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport ● stream
G ros s Datarate
Indicates the total data rate on the IP feed.
Stream Status
Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is being fed Ok, No to the transmitter via the TS1/2 IN sockets (X20/X21). If Stream a fault is displayed here, first c heck the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE).
Packet Length
Indicates the detected packet length of the transport stream.
Read only
MIP/IIP/TCP+DB
Depending on the selected TVfor standard, this whether additional information operation in indicates single ‑fre- quency networks (SFN) is present in the data stream.
Read only
Value access Maintenance
Read only Read only
"Settings" parameters "Device View" > "Tx" > "Exciter A | B" > "Input 1 | 2" > "Settings" GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Mute (on Input Fail)
Used to define the operating behavior when the active No, Yes input fails. This parameter is available in MFN mode only. No – In this mode, the output signal is not sup● pressed if the active input fails. Null packets are ●
Value range
Value access Maintenance
output instead. Yes – If the active input fails, the output signal is suppressed.
Input Fail Delay
Used to set a delay time which must elapse following an 0 s to 600 s input signal failure before the output signal is suppressed and a sum fault is generated.
Maintenance
Force Exciter Changeover
Used to determine whether switchover to another redun- Yes, No dant exciter is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and N+1). Yes – In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is sig● naled to the higher ‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to switch over to another
Maintenance
●
4.3.3.2
exciter or transmitter. No – In the "No" position, no switchover takes place.
Input Signal Switchover The R&S®TCE900 in the R&S®TCE900 exciter configuration has an automatic switchover function which, in the event of a signal failure at one logical input, switches over to the other logical input (provided that a valid input signal is available at the other logical input). Before a failure occurs, the preselected input is active. The way in which this automatic switchover function operates is determined by the following factors:
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
85
109/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Device View Description Exciter
Automatic input switchover ON/OFF If automatic switchover is OFF, the preselected input remains active even if the input signal fails.If automatic switchover is ON and there is a failure at the (preselected) input, switchover to the standby input takes place. Input priority (Preferred Input = Logical Input 1/2) Following switchover of the priority logical input to the standby input, the automatic system switches back to this priority input as soon as a signal returns. All switchover operations are delayed for the set delay times. If the signal fails at both the main input and the standby input, the priority input remains active. Inputs with equal priority (Preferred Input = none) Following switchover of the active logical input, the second input with the same priority remains active until the input signal fails on this input also. The automatic system switches back to the preselected input, but only if a signal is present on it once again (and if "Switch to" is set to "reserve & back"). All switchover operations are delayed for the set delay times. Selecting this operating mode minimizes the number of switchover operations and, in certain cases, the number of breaks in transmission.
Direction of switchover (Switch to) The "to reserve and back" switch position enables switchover in both directions, i.e. to and from the standby input, depending on which of the two logical inputs is currently faulty. The "reserve" switch position ensures that switchover takes place once only. Following switchover, the automatic system switches to "switched" and the "Active" indicator disappears. Switchback to the preselected input takes place when the active input is switched over by pressing the input selector switch (Selector) and then selecting the preselected input. If the switch is set to "reserve", the switchback to the preselected input is suppressed.
Seamless switching The automatic input signal switchover function has an operating mode which permits seamless switching between two inputs. Seamless switching is activated using the "Seamless" switch. If seamless switching is possible, the switchover always takes place immediately, irrespective of the set guard times. Seamless switching is available without restriction for operation in single‑frequency networks (SFN). For operation in MFNs, it is necessary to set the maximum expected delay time between the two signal feeds. The signal which arrives earlier is delayed by the set time and the signal which arrives later is adjusted to the earlier signal. The currently measured delay between the two inputs is displayed to provide an adjustment aid. In SFN and MFN mode, signals can be fed via two different media (e.g. ASI and IP).
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
86
110/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Manual switchover between inputs Manual switchover is possible when the automatic input signal switchover function is both on and off. ●
Switchover with automatic input signal switchover OFF The input can be switched over in the "Home" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by pressing the input selector switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired input "Selected Input".
●
Switchover with automatic input signal switchover ON The input can be switched over in the "Home" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu by pressing the input selector switch ("Selector") and then selecting the desired input "Selected Input" if the two inputs are configured with equal priority (Preferred Input = None). If one of the inputs is configured as having priority, switchover is performed by changing the priority input "Preferred Input" in the same menu.
"Automatic input signal switchover" parameters GUI name (exter- Help text (English) nal) Automatic (State)
Value range
Indicates the state of the automatic input signal switchover function. Off, Active, Off: Changed ● The automatic switchover function is switched off. ● Active: The automatic switchover function is ready to switch the currently active input over to the input currently not in use as soon as the input signal of the currently active input fails. Changed: ●
Value access
Read only
The automatic switchover function has switched over from the preferred input to the standby input. "Changed" is only displayed if switchback is not permitted. ("Switch to" = reserve) Seamless Switch- Indicates whether seamless switching of the input signal is possible. not Possible, Pos- Read only ing sible "Not Possible" appears if only one input signal is fed, if two different data streams are present at the two inputs or if in MFN mode the set "Max Delay between Inputs" is not sufficient to align the two signals with each other. If seamless switching is possible, it always takes place immediately when required, regardless of whether a "Guard Time to Reserve" or "Guard Time Back" has been set. Automatic
Activates automatic switchover of the input signal to the standby input if Off, On the preferred input fails.
Operation
Preferred Input
Used to select the preferred input which the automatic input signal switchover function should use whenever possible.
Input 1, Input 2, None
Operation
Selected Input
Used to select the active input to be used when the automatic input signal Input 1, Input 2 switchover function is off. If the automatic switchover function is on, the input can be switched over using this switch if Preferred Input is set to "No Preference" or a switchover to the standby input has taken place. Switchover of the input is otherwise performed using the "Preferred Input" switch.
Operation
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
87
111/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
GUI name (exter- Help text (English) nal)
Value range
Value access
Switch to
Reserve Only,
Maintenance
Used to set the operational response of the automatic switchover func-
tion. Reserve & Back "To Reserve Only": ● The automatic switchover function switches over once from the preferred input to the standby input and then assumes the "not ready" state". Switching the active input over manually to the preferred input reactivates the automatic switchover function. "To Reserve and Back": ● Following successful switchover to the s tandby input, the automatic switchover function can also switch back automatically if the signal at the standby input fails. Guard Time to Reserve
Guard Time Back
If Reserve Fails
Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic switch- over function switches over to the standby input if the input signal at the preferred input fails. The set guard time has no effect if seamless switching is possible. In this case, the switchover always takes place immediately without interruption (i.e. seamlessly). Used to set a guard time which must elapse before the automatic switch- over function switches back to the preferred input if the input signal at the standby input fails. If seamless switching is possible, switchover always takes place immediately without interruption regardless of the set guard time. If "to Reserve Only" was selected as the "Direction", the set guard time has no effect. Used to determine whether the signal at the standby input is to be moni- Do Not Show tored. Warning, Show If the transmitter is operated with only one input signal or the standby Warning ● input is connected only temporarily, "Do Not Show Warning" must be selected. If two redundant input signals are normally supplied to the transmit● ter, "Show Warning" must be selected.
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
4.3.4 Controlling Time of Transmission in Single-Frequency Networks (SFN) For operation in single-frequency networks (SFN), the R&S®TCE900 exciter has a function which allows the time at which the signal is transmitted to be controlled. In the SFN, time synchronization of all exciters in the network is performed using a seconds pulse (PPS), which is generally obtained at the exciter site via GPS satellites. Controlling time of transmission Control of the time of transmission is switched on and off in the "Device View (Home)" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" > "SFN Regulation" menu ("Time Synchronization" tab) by means of the "SFN Sync" switch (On (SFN) / Off (MFN)). This function can only be used if the exciter has a time reference (exception: ISDB‑T Static SFN). The following options are available: ●
Feed of an external PPS signal (pulse per second)
●
Use of an integrated GPS receiver (requires option key)
If the time reference fails during operation, the exciter can revert to its integrated frequency control function (see the chapter "Frequency Control") and calculate a highly
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
88
112/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
precise PPS internally. To do so, the exciter only needs to be able to synchronize with a PPS once for a few seconds after it has started. If the time and frequency reference fail at the same time, Holdover Mode becomes active. In this operating mode, the accuracy of "time of transmission" control depends on the frequency stability of the integrated, temperature‑stabilized 10 MHz crystal oscillator (OXCO). Since, in Holdover Mode, calculation of the time of transmission becomes increasingly inaccurate over time, the output signal of the exciter can be switched off after a configurable Guard Time. Special points with ISDB T With ISDB‑T, three different operating modes are supported. ●
Dynamic SFN The time of transmission of the signal for all transmitters in a single‑frequency network (SFN) is controlled relative to a common seconds pulse.
●
Static SFN The time of transmission of the signal is set statically for each individual transmitter. The delay time on the feed path must be constant.
● Auto The operating mode (Dynamic SFN or Static SFN) is set automatically using transmitter ‑specific information in the IIP (ISDB ‑T Information Packet).
Special points with ATSC With ATSC, up to three different synchronization types are supported. The respective synchronization type must be enabled by means of a corresponding software option. ●
R&S Mobile If mobile content is transmitted and a R&S®AEM100 Emission Mux/SFN inserter is used, the "RSMobile" synchronization type must be selected.
●
R&S A53 If normal content is transmitted and a R&S®AEM100 Emission Mux/SFN inserter is used, the "RSA53" synchronization type must be selected.
● A/110 In the case of the standard‑conforming SFN synchronization corresponding to ATSC A/110B, the "A/110" synchronization type must be selected. It contains a compatible
expansion to allow use of Mobile DTV. With the synchronization types "R&S Mobile" and "A/110", a distinction is also made as to whether the time of transmission is to be synchronized primarily using data from the TCP information or using data from the dummy bytes. Setting and display of time of transmission In the "Device View (Home)" > "Transmitter" > "Exciter" menu ("SFN Delay" tab), the time of transmission is displayed relative to the reference time. The time of transmission can be adapted individually by setting an additional static delay. The following delays occur:
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
89
113/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
●
●
Maximum Delay Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (MIP inserter) to the transmit antenna for regular transmission. This delay is set in the SFN adapter and is the default for all transmitters of the SFN. Network Delay Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center (SFN adapter) to the input of the exciter. With IP feed, the time for forward error correction (FEC) and packet reordering is added to the Network Delay. This delay depends on the used transmission path. (Not available for DVB‑T2)
●
Processing Delay Minimum transit time of the signal through the exciter. This delay depends on the set transmission parameters.
●
Dynamic Delay Period of time by which signal processing is delayed artificially in order to achieve
●
the desired time of transmission. Total Delay Actual transit time of the signal through the exciter. This time is the sum of Processing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
●
Static Delay Offset Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual transmitter site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission preset under Maximum Delay. The Static Delay Offset is used to compensate differences between transmission systems from different manufacturers.
●
Tx Offset Delay (only for DVB‑T, ISDB‑T) Positive or negative offset (transferred in the data stream for the individual transmitter site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission preset under Maximum Delay. If Static Delay and Tx Offset Delay are present at the same time, their effect is added together.
●
Dispatch Time (for ATSC, DVB-T, ISDB-T only) This is the actual time of transmission. It is the network‑wide Maximum Delay plus the transmitter ‑specific Time Offsets.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
90
114/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Fig. 4-3: Delays in SFN 1 2 3 4
= = = =
Time of signal feed (MIP inserter) Signal feed at exciter (Ts x IN) Regular time of transmission of station (Tx) Individually corrected time of transmission of station (Dispatch Time)
*Network Delay and Maximum Delay not available with DVB‑T2 4.3.4.1
Settings
"Time Synchronization" parameters ●
Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Exciter A | B" >"SFN Regulation" > "Time Synchronization"
GUI name
Description
Source
The suitable signal source for synchronizing the time of External transmission can be selected in this list. PPS, Internal GPS
Maintenance
Ext. PPS
Indicates whether a seconds pulse is present at the 1PPS_IN socket (X23) at the TCE.
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Value range
No Signal, Inaccurate, OK
Value access
91
115/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
GUI name
Description
Value range
Int. GPS PPS
Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is return- No Signal, ing a stable seconds pulse (PPS). This function must Inaccurate,
Value access Read only
have been enabled by installing an option key in the TCE. OK SFN Sync
Used to activate time synchronization. Off (MFN): The time of transmission is not control● led. On(SFN): The time of transmission of a symbol is ● the same for all the transmitters of a single ‑frequency network (SFN).
On (SFN), Off Maintenance (MFN)
SFN Sync Mode
Used to define the type of time synchronization. This switch is available only in the ATSC standard and after the appropriate software options have been enabled. RSMobile: For transmitting mobile content and ● when using a R&S®AEM100 Emission Mux/SFN inserter. RSA53: When transmitting normal content and ● when using a R&S®AEM100 Emission Mux/SFN inserter. ● A/110: For standard‑conforming SFN synchronization corresponding to ATSC A/110B. It contains a compatible expansion to allow use of Mobile DTV.
RSMobile, RSA53, A/ 110
Maintenance
OK, Holdover, Holdover expired,
Read only
With the synchronization types "R&S Mobile" and "A/ 110", a distinction can also be made as to whether the time of transmission is to be synchronized primarily using data from the TCP information or using data from the dummy bytes. PPS State
Indicates whether the internally formed PPS is phase‑synchronized with the frequency control. OK: The PPS is phase‑synchronized with the fre● ●
●
●
quency control. Holdover: The PPS and the reference frequency of Missing the frequency control have failed. Time synchronization is now performed with the accuracy of the integrated crystal oscillator (OCXO). Holdover Expired: The maximum time for which the transmitter is permitted to remain in holdover mode has expired (see the Frequency Control menu). Missing: No PPS signal has been detected since the TCE900 exciter was last started.
If "OK" is not displayed, the signal source of the frequency control must be checked. Max. Deviation
Used to select the maximum permitted deviation of the time of transmission relative to the internally controlled
0 µs to 100 μs Read only
reference frequency. If the set value is exceeded, the absolute time of transmission is recalculated. This causes a brief signal failure (mute). SFN State
Indicates whether or not the fed signal can be transmitted in a time‑synchronous manner. If the "No Time Reference" fault message is displayed, the reference feed of the Time Synchronization and the Frequency Regulation must be checked. If the "No Time Information" fault message is displayed, it must be checked whether the control information for the time of transmission is contained in the data stream. (See the "Input" menu.)
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
SFN Resync, No Time Information, No Time Reference, SFN Resync, In Time
Read only
92
116/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
"SFN Delay" parameters ●
Path: "Device View (Home)" > "Tx " > "Exciter A | B" >"SFN Regulation" > "SFN Delay"
GUI name
Description
Value range
Maximum Delay
Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center 0 s to 1 s to the transmit antenna for regular transmission. This delay is set at the SFN adapter and is the default for all transmitters of the dynamic SFN.
Read only
Network Delay
Time taken for the signal to travel from the playout center 0 s to 1 s to the input of the signal processing unit. This delay depends on the used transmission path. If an IP feed is used, the FEC processing time is a component of the Network Delay (not available for DVB ‑T2).
Read only
Processing Time
Indicates the internal transit time for signal processing in 0 s to 1 s the exciter. It depends on the set modulation parameters.
Read only
Dynamic Delay
Indicates the signal delay controlled by the SFN (sin0 s to 1 s gle‑frequency network) synchronization which is required in order to meet the desired time of transmission exactly. The displayed value contains the set Static Delay Offset as well as the Tx Time Offset (if available).
Read only
Total Delay
Indicates the total transit time of the signal through the transmitter. It is the sum of Processing Delay plus Dynamic Delay.
Read only
Static Delay Offset
Positive or negative offset (set manually for the individual 0 s to 1 s transmitter site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission preset under Maximum
0 s to 1 s
Value access
Maintenance
Delay. The Static Delay is used to compensate differences between transmission systems from different manufacturers. Tx Offset Delay
Positive or negative offset (transferred in the MIP 0 s to 1 s (DVB‑T) or in the IIP (ISDB‑T) for the individual transmitter site) of the time of transmission relative to the regular time of transmission preset under Maximum Delay. This delay can only be displayed and activ ated if the Tx automatic function (DVB‑T) or equipment control (ISDB ‑T) has been activated. If Tx Offset Delay and Static Delay are active at the same time, their effect is added together.
Read only
Dispatch Time
Time from the point at which the signal leaves the playout 0 s to 1 s center until its actual transmission at the transmit
Read only
antenna. This delay corresponds to the Maximum Delay (compulsory for all transmitters in an SFN) plus Static Delay Offset plus Tx Time Offset (if available).
4.3.5
Using Frequency Control The R&S®TCE900 in the TCE900 exciter configuration has a transmit frequency control function. Depending on the accuracy and stability requirements, one of two operating modes can be selected for the transmitter.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
93
117/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
●
Free wheeling mode Here the transmit frequency is formed from a temperature‑stabilized 10 MHz crystal oscillator (OXCO). The frequency stability is sufficient for continuous operation in multiple frequency networks (MFN).
●
Operation with reference frequency Here the transit frequency is stabilized by means of a reference frequency. The following options are available: – External 10 MHz reference frequency –
External PPS (pulse per second)
–
Built‑in GPS receiver (requires option key)
The frequency stability and frequency accuracy which can be achieved in this way fulfill the increased requirements for operation of the transmitter in single ‑frequency networks. If several reference signals are available at the same time, automatic selection of the most suitable reference frequency is possible. If the reference signal fails, the transmitter switches over to Holdover Mode and frequency control operates with the accuracy of the temperature‑stabilized 10 MHz crystal oscillator (OXCO). Since, in Holdover Mode, frequency control becomes increasingly inaccurate over time, the output signal of the exciter can be switched off after a configurable Guard Time. In the case of reference signals with major fluctuations (jitter), e.g. with non‑controlled external GPS receivers, a jitter correction function can be activated. For measuring purposes, the used reference signal or one of the reference signals processed internally in the exciter can be output via the Monitor-Out socket (X24). "Frequency Regulation" parameters ●
Path:"Device View (Home)" > "Tx" > "Exciter" > "Frequency Regulation" > Tab "Frequency Regulation"
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Source
The suitable signal source for the frequency reference can be either detected automatically or preselected in this list. If multiple signal sources are connected simultaneously for "Auto", the external reference is selected in preference to the internal GPS. With "Manual", the inter-
Manual, Read only external 5MHz, external 10MHz, external PPS,
nal crystal oscillator (OCXO) is calibrated manually and the transmitter can be operated completely without an external reference source (not suitable for single ‑frequency networks).
GPS, Auto
Current Source
Indicates the signal source currently used for frequency Manual, External control. 5MHz, External 10MHz, External PPS, internal GPS
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Value access
Read only
94
118/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Value access
Ext Reference
Indicates whether a reference signal is present at the REF_IN socket (X64) at the TCE.
No Signal, Inaccurate,
Read only
OK Ext PPS
Indicates whether a seconds pulse is present at the 1PPS_IN socket (X23) at the TCE.
No Signal, Inaccurate, OK
Read only
Int. GPS PPS
Indicates whether the integrated GPS receiver is return- No Signal, Inaccurate, ing a stable seconds pulse (PPS). This function must have been enabled by installing an option key in the TCE. OK
Read only
Reference
Indicates the state of the reference used. In single‑frequency networks, a failure of the reference can cause a malfunction and thus lead to switchover of the exciter.
Fault, Warning, OK
Read only
Freq. Stability
Indicates the frequency accuracy of the regulator. The
Unknown,
Read only
highest possible ("Excellent") is only reached at least 24 hours accuracy after switching on the exciter. This ensures that if the reference fails, there are no faults in single‑frequency networks before the guard time runs out.
Inaccurate, Good, Excellent
Jitter Correction
When using an external reference source with high jitter, On, Off activating this function can provide better frequency stability. With "Good" reference signals, this function should be disabled as the regulator takes significantly longer to attain its maximum frequency stability. When the internal GPS is used, this function is enabled automatically.
Maintenance
Manual OCXO Adjust
Enables manual adjustment of the internal crystal oscillator. To allow this, a frequency counter which is
Maintenance
0 to 65535
synchronized via a highly accurate reference must be connected via the monitor output. On Ref. Fail Mute
Used to define the behavior if the reference source fails. Never, at Maintenance Startup, After "Never": Muting never takes place. This causes ● faults in single‑frequency networks, especially after Guard Time power failures. "At Startup": After a power failure, muting takes ● place until the regulator is synchronized. If the reference fails, the transmitter will continue running as long as possible. "After Guard Time": Muting takes place not only ● after power failures, but also after failure of the reference and expiry of the set Guard Time.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
95
119/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Guard Time
This value defines for how many hours the signal pro0 to 24 hours cessing should continue running without synchronization
Value access Maintenance
if the reference connection fails. The Guard Time is active only if the "Freq Stability" was "Good" at the time of the failure. The longer the time selected is, the poorer the accuracy of the transmitting frequency will become. In addition, the time of transmission of the signal shifts. If this uses up the guard interval, reception problems occur in single‑frequency networks. Monitor Out
Used to select the signal to be output at the Monitor Out Off, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 1 socket (X24). PPS, GPS, Current Source
Operation
4.3.6 Precorrection Each TCE900 exciter is equipped with an adaptive precorrector that continuously compensates for nonlinear distortion of the amplifiers and linear distortions of the output filter. As a result, in both cases a high‑quality signal is present at the output of the transmitter. Adaptive nonlinear precorrection For adaptive nonlinear precorrection, enter a minimum shoulder distance that must not be undershot. The precorrector will calculate a new precorrection curve as soon as a shoulder distance below the set value is measured. The adaptive precorrection can be stopped if necessary (Adaptive Predistortion = Stop). The current precorrection curve remains in effect. For measuring purposes, the adaptive nonlinear precorrector can be bypassed (Adaptive Predistortion = Bypass) so that the TCE900 exciter returns an undistorted signal at its RF output. The precorrector can be restarted manually (Reset), making it possible to calculate a better precorrection curve, even if the shoulder distance has not yet been undershot. The current precorrection is lost as a result. Adaptive linear precorrection With adaptive linear precorrection, limit values for amplitude (Amplitude Ripple) and group delay (Group Delay Ripple) must be set. The precorrector will calculate a new precorrection curve as soon as the limit values are exceeded. The adaptive precorrection can be stopped if necessary (Adaptive Predistortion = Stop). The current precorrection curve remains in effect. For measuring purposes, the adaptive linear precorrector can be bypassed (Adaptive Predistortion = Bypass) so that the TCE900 exciter returns an undistorted signal at its RF output.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
96
120/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
The precorrector can be restarted manually (Reset), making it possible to calculate a better precorrection curve, even if the shoulder distance has not yet been undershot. The current precorrection is lost as a result. The adaptive adjustment of nonlinear precorrection is not available for analog TV standards.
Crest factor reduction Available as an option for all COFDM standards The crest factor feature provides the possibility of improving the signal parameters "MER" and "Shoulder Distance" separately. Additionally, the signal can be improved and the DC supply voltage reduced at the amplifier to increase efficiency; this simultaneously reduces the crest factor of the transmitter. Sound phase shifter Only available for analog TV standards The sound phase shifter modifies the phase of the sound subcarrier as a function of the low-frequency modulation of the picture signal. When the sound phase shifter is switched on, its characteristic curve is determined using two onset points. The reference for setting the position is initially a value of 37.5 % for the back porch. Smaller values are in the range of the sync pulse; a value of 15 % corresponds to a
‑
sync pulse amplitude of 300 mV. Larger values are in the picture range; a value of 90 % corresponds to a picture amplitude of 700 mV. An additional condition is that the setting for onset point 1 must always be greater than that of onset point 2. The sharpness of the two onset points is determined by the slope of the characteristic curve at these points. The magnitude of the setting determines the magnitude of the phase shift, whereby a setting of 50 % specifies the maximum value. The sign of the setting value determines whether the phase is shifted in the positive or negative direction. When the characteristic curve is calculated, it is divided into three linear areas by the two onset points. No takes for modulation picture signal in the area between the twophase onset shift points, i.e. place a correction phase ofof 0°the is set. A correction phase unequal to 0° is set in the case of picture signal modulation that is greater than the position of onset point 1. The characteristic curve in this area begins with a correction phase of 0°, with modulation corresponding to the position of onset point 1, and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with slope 1, with 100 % modulation of the picture signal. Similarly, a correction phase unequal to 0° is also set in the case of picture signal modulation that is smaller than the position of onset point 2. The characteristic curve in this area begins with a correction phase of 0°, with modulation corresponding to the position
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
97
121/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
of onset point 2, and increases linearly up to the maximum phase set with slope 2, with 0 % modulation of the picture signal.
"Settings" parameters ● Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Settings Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Adaptive Precorrection (non Linear)
The nonlinear precorrector is used to compensate amplifier faults. The quality of precorrection affects the shoulder distance of the output signal.
Bypass, Stop, Run
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here. Bypass ● The nonlinear precorrector is deactivated. The signal is not modified inside the exciter. ●
●
Stop Adaptive precorrection is deactivated. The correction curve that was determined last is active inside the exciter. Run Digital TV standards only:The adaptive precorrector is active. The best possible precorrection curve to compensate amplitude and phase errors of the amplifiers is determined continuously. Analog TV standards only:The automatic precorrector is active. The best possible precorrection curve to compensate amplitude and phase errors of the amplifiers is determined once.The precorrector then enters "Stop" mode. The program is interrupted during precorrection.
In certain situations, it may be advisable to have a suitable precorrection curve determined automatically first and then to switch adaptive precorrection to "Stop" so that the found precorrection curve can no longer change. Calculation of a new precorrection curve can be forced by performing a reset. Input Level (non Linear)
Indicates whether the level of the input signal is sufficient. "No Input" appears if the transmitter is off or if the connection to the RF test point is interrupted.
Ok, too Low, too High, No Input
Read only
Shoulder Distance (non Linear)
Indicates the minimum shoulder distance that is to be achieved by the adaptive nonlinear precorrector.
30 dB to 45 dB
Maintenance
Signal Limiter (non Limits the signal at the input of the nonlinear precorrector. Linear) The setting can be changed here.
6 dB to 12 dB
Maintenance
Shoulder Left (non Indicates the shoulder distance attained by the circuit for automatic Linear) switchover, measured in the left part of the signal spectrum.
Read only
Shoulder Right (non Linear)
Indicates the shoulder distance attained by the circuit for automatic switchover, measured in the right part of the signal spectrum.
Read only
Status (non Linear)
Indicates the status of the nonlinear precorrector. Idle ● The precorrector is not active.
Idle, Acquisition, Calculation
Read only
The setting can be changed here. The precorrector will calculate a new precorrection curve as soon as a shoulder distance below the set value is measured.
●
Acquisition The precorrector is currently recording new measurement values.
●
Calculation The precorrector is currently calculating a new precorrection curve.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
98
122/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Reset (non Linear) Resets the precorrection. If the precorrector is in "run" mode, a new pre- correction curve is calculated.
Maintenance
Adaptive Precorrection (Linear)
Bypass, Stop, Run
Maintenance
Ok, too Low, too High, No Input
Read only
The linear precorrector is used to compensate output filter faults. The quality of precorrection affects the amplitude and group delay ripple of the output signal. The setting can be changed here. Bypass ● The linear precorrector is deactivated. The signal is not modified inside the exciter. ●
Stop Adaptive precorrection is deactivated. The correction curve that was determined last is active inside the exciter.
●
Run Digital TV standards only:The adaptive precorrector is active. The best possible precorrection curve to compensate amplitude and group delay errors caused by the output filter is determined continuously. Analog TV standards only:The automatic precorrector is active. The best possible precorrection curve to compensate amplitude and group delay errors caused by the output filter is determined once.The precorrector then enters "Stop" mode. The program is interrupted during precorrection.
In certain situations, it may be advisable to have a suitable precorrection curve determined automatically first and then to switch adaptive precorrection to "Stop" so that the found precorrection curve can no longer change. Input Level (Linear)
Indicates whether the level of the input signal is sufficient. "No Input" appears if the transmitter is off.
Amplitude Ripple Limit (Linear)
Indicates the desired maximum amplitude ripple at the output of the filter. 0 dB to 2 dB If the circuit for automatic switchover is switched on, the precorrector attempts to modify the signal to such an extent that the amplitude ripple remains below the specified limit.
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.
Amplitude Ripple (Linear)
Indicates the residual ripple in the amplitude frequency response attained by the circuit for automatic switchover.
Group Delay Limit (Linear)
Indicates the desired maximum group delay ripple at the output of the 10 ns to 500 ns filter. If the circuit for automatic switchover is switched on, the precorrector attempts to modify the signal to such an extent that the group delay ripple remains below the specified limit.
Read only
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here. Group Delay Ripple (Linear)
Indicates the residual ripple in the group delay attained by the circuit for automatic switchover.
Read only
Status (Linear)
Indicates the status of the linear precorrector. Idle ● The precorrector is not active.
Read only
●
Acquisition The precorrector is currently recording new measurement values.
●
Calculation The precorrector is currently calculating a new precorrection curve.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Idle, Acquisition, Calculation
99
123/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Exciter
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Slope (Linear)
Indicates the asymmetry compensation caused by the RF cable used between the RF test point downstream of the output filter and the input
‒1 dB to 1 dB
Maintenance
of the linear precorrector. The setting can be changed here. Reset (Linear)
Resets the precorrection. If the precorrector is in "run" mode, a new pre- correction curve is calculated.
Maintenance
"Crest Factor" parameters Available as an option for all COFDM standards ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Crest Factor
Name
Description
Reduction
Activates manual crest factor reduction. This function is used to optimize Bypass, Manual the efficiency of the transmitter. Bypass ● Crest factor reduction is deactivated. ●
Value range
Access right Maintenance
Manual Activates manual crest factor reduction.
Crest Factor
Used to set the crest factor of the exciter's output signal. Setting a low crest factor allows the efficiency of the transmitter to be increased as a result of the lower operating voltage of the amplifiers. This can lead to an increase in intermodulation products outside the frequency band and to a reduction in MER.
7 dB to 15 dB
Maintenance
Inband Noise
Increasing this value results in a lower crest factor. This, however,
10 % to 100 %
Maintenance
reduces MER. Outband Noise
Increasing this value produces a lower crest factor; however, this results 0 % to 50 % in an increase in intermodulation products outside the frequency band.
Maintenance
"Advanced Precorrection" parameters Available for analog TV standards ●
Path:Device View (Home) > Transmitter > Exciter > Pre-Correction > Advanced Precorrection
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Test Signal (Nonlinear Extension)
Generates signals with different modulation in order to increase the video S/N ratio using an external measuring instrument. Measurement of the video S/N ratio and adjustment of the associated slopes allows the S/N ratio to be optimized for various picture contents.
Black, Grey, White, Off
Maintenance
Black Slope (Non- Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at high levels. linear Extension) The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in "Stop" mode and the test signal "Black" has been activated.
‒50 % to 50 %
Maintenance
Grey Slope (Nonlinear Extension)
‒50 % to 50 %
Maintenance
Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at medium levels. The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in "Stop" mode and the test signal "Grey" has been activated.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
100
124/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Cooling
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
White Slope (Nonlinear Exten-
Used to optimize the video S/N ratio at low levels.
‒50 % to 50 %
Maintenance
Off, On
Maintenance
0 % to 100 %
Maintenance
sion)
The value can only be changed if the nonlinear precorrector is in "Stop" mode and the test signal "White" has been activated.
Phase Correction (FM Carrier 1/2)
Indicates whether the sound phase shifter for carrier 1 and carrier 2 is switched on. The setting can be changed here.
Trigger Point 1/2 (FM Carrier 1/2)
Indicates the position defined for the respective onset point of the phase shifter (referenced to modulation of the picture signal). The setting can be changed here.
Slope 1/2 (FM Carrier 1/2)
Indicates the value that has been set for the slope at the respective onset ‒50 % to 50 % point of the phase shifter.
Maintenance
The setting can be changed here.
4.4 Cooling
4.4.1 Configuring Switching Thresholds (Pressure) and Flow Volumes The switching thresholds (pressure) and flow volumes are configured in the following way. 1. Using the menu bar, navigate to the following: "Devices" > "Transmitter" > "Output Stage" > "Cooling" 2. Select the "Task View" button in the menu bar. 3. Select the "Setup Cooling" button. 4. The following parameters can be set: a) for Design: ● Type: ● Heat Exchangers per Rack: ● Fans per Heat Exchanger: b) for Coolant Temperature: ● ● ● ● c) for ● ● ●
Set Point Temperature: Outlet Temperature: Warning Limit: Fault Limit: Coolant Pressure: Pressure Warning Limit: Pressure Fault Limit: Extra Flow Rate:
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
101
125/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Cooling
d) for Temperature and Noise Management: ● ● ●
Max Fan Speed: If Temp Exceeds Warning Limit: If Temp Exceeds Warning Limit:
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Value access
Type
A distinction must be made between the following types: R&S Cooling If the transmitter is connected to a 9000 series cooling sys- site Cooling ● tem, select "R&S Cooling". If the transmitter is connected to an existing site cooling sys- 8000 Cooling ● tem, use the "Site Cooling" setting. In this case, warning and fault signaling lines which are routed to terminal x8000 of the mains distribution board (MDB) are evaluated.
Configuration
Heat Exchangers / Rack
Either 1 or 2 redundant heat exchangers can be used in each rack. The set value affects fan monitoring and also the indicators on the user interface.
1 or 2
Configuration
Fans / Heat Exchanger Either 1 or 2 fans can be used for each heat exchanger. The set 0 to 2 value affects fan monitoring and also the indicators on the user interface.
Configuration
Set Point Temperature At this temperature, the temperature control system will attempt 25 to 65 to adjust the coolant temperature by changing the fan speed at the heat exchangers. If the temperature drops below or exceeds the control range, the actual coolant temperature can be higher or lower.
Configuration
Fault Limit (Coolant Temperature)
If the coolant temperature exceeds this value, a fault is triggered 50 to 65 and the rack is shut down. In n+1 systems, this event can lead to switchover of the transmitter.
Configuration
Warning Limit (Coolant Temperature)
If the coolant temperature exceeds this value, a warning is triggered. The fault threshold is permanently set to 65 °C.
40 to 65
Configuration
(Coolant Pressure) Warning Limit
If the coolant pressure drops to this value or lower, a warning is triggered. Normally, this value should be set higher than the value for the corresponding "Fault Limit".
0 to 4
Configuration
(Coolant Pressure) Fault Limit
If the coolant pressure drops to this value or lower, a fault is trig- 0 to 4 gered. Normally, this value should be lower than the value for the corresponding "Warning Limit".
Configuration
Max Fan Speed
If necessary, the maximum speed of the fans at the heat exchanger can be decreased in order to reduce noise. This can, however, result in an increase in coolant temperature or even in
50 to 100
Configuration
Keep Fans Quiet
Configuration
shutdown of the transmitter. If Temperature Exceeds Warning Limit (Fans)
If a speed limit has been activated for the fans, this switch can be used to select how the cooling system is to respond if the warning threshold for the return temperature is exceeded. "Keep Fans Quiet" ● The speed limit for the fans remains activated. The transmitter is shut down when the fault threshold for the return temperature is reached. "Rise Noise Level of Fans" ● The set speed limit for the fans is deactivated and the fan speed is automatically increased to max. 100 % of the nominal speed.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
1=Rise Noise Level of Fans
102
126/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Cooling
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Value access
If Temperature Exceeds Warning
Automatic reduction of the output power can be performed in order to reduce the temperature level of cooling when the warning
Keep Nominal RF Power
Configuration
Limit (RF)
threshold is exceeded. In this case, the amplifiers are automatically precorrected corresponding to their lower power.
Reduce RF Power to 80% Reduce RF Power to 60%
Extra Flow Rate
In addition to the minimum flow rate predetermined by the number 0 of amplifiers, the flow can be increased in two stages if additional +10 components which require cooling (e.g. dummy load) are instal+20 led.
Configuration
Hide Pump Errors
During registration of pumps on the pump bus, this switch can be Off used to hide fault messages which could otherwise cause the On transmitter to shut down. This makes it possible to disconnect pumps from the bus without interrupting operation.
Maintenance
Hide Fan Errors
During registration of fans on the fan bus, this switch can be used Off to hide fault messages which could otherwise cause the transOn mitter to shut down. This makes it possible to disconnect fans from the bus without interrupting operation. The switch acts on all fans of an output stage.
Maintenance
Site Cooling Warning
Warnings from the site cooling system are displayed here. This message only functions if the appropriate signals from the site cooling system are supplied via terminal x8000 of the mains distribution board (MDB).
Read only
Site Cooling Fault
OK Warning
Faults at the site cooling system are displayed here. This mesOK sage only functions if the appropriate signals from the site cooling Fault system are supplied via terminal x8000 of the mains distribution
Read only
board (MDB). Pump (State)
Indicates whether the pump has been correctly registered on the Not Found pump communication bus by the transmitter control unit. Installed
Read only
Motor (State)
Indicates whether the pump motor can run freely or is mechanically blocked. To rectify this fault, the pump must be disassembled and checked for foreign objects.
Blocked
Read only
Operating Hours (Pump)
Indicates how long the pump has been in operation.
0 to 999999
(Pump) Type
Indicates the used pump type. The displayed type is identical to 40-100 the type specified on the type plate of the pump. 32-120 The type "40-100" should be used for transmitters with up to ● ●
OK Read only
Read only
6 amplifiers. The type "32-120" should be used for transmitters with more than 6 amplifiers.
Flow
Indicates the currently measured flow through the pump.
0 to 200
Read only
Speed
Indicates the currently measured speed of the pump motor.
0 to 100
Fan (State)
Indicates whether the assigned fan is correctly registered on the not found fan communication bus. installed
Read only
( Fan)Motor
Indicates whether the fan motor is ready for operation or is mechanically blocked.
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Blocked OK
103
127/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Cooling
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
(Fan)Supply
If this message appears, the fan is disconnected from the power OK supply. Failure Check the position of the maintenance switch on the pump unit and also the fan circuit breakers in the mains distribution unit of the rack.
Inlet Temp.
Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing into the transmitter rack.
‒30 to +90
Read only
Outlet Temp.
Indicates the temperature of the coolant flowing out of the trans- ‒30 to +90 mitter rack toward the heat exchanger. The temperature must not exceed a maximum value of 65 °C.
Read only
Pressure
Indicates the pressure of the coolant. With the pumps switched off, this pressure can be slightly lower than when the pumps are running. The correct pressure depends on the delivery head of the pumps, the temperature of the coolant and the altitude of the operating location.
Read only
0 to 6
Value access Read only
Precise pressure tables can be found in the manual. Antifreeze
Used to define whether or not the fans at the heat exchanger are Off; On to switch off if the temperature drops well below the specified temperature. Off: The fans switch off. This setting is recommended in order to reduce the energy consumption of the cooling system. On: The fans continue to run even at low outside temperatures. This setting is recommended if the risk of fan seizure due to freezing is to be reduced. Note: Even if antifreeze mode is active, the condensation protection function of the transmitter will still switch off the fans at an inlet temperature below approx. +10 °C. The fans are designed in such a way that they are not damaged if they seize up due to freezing.
Configuration
Auto/On
If the switch is set to "On", the cooling system is switched on irrespective of whether or not the transmitter is on. This setting should only be used when putting the system into operation. If the switch is set to "Auto", the cooling system is switched on/off when the transmitter is switched on/off.
Configuration
4.4.2
Cooling is always On; Cooling is switched on by Parameter "On"
Configuring Pumps and Fans The pumps and fans are configured in the following way.
For a standard cooling system with one transmitter rack and one pump unit, configuration is performed automatically. Manual configuration is only necessary in the following cases: ●
More than one rack
●
More than one heat exchanger per rack
Configuring pumps 1. Under "Devices" > "Transmitter" > "Output Stage" > "Cooling", switch to the Task View and navigate further to "Install Pumps".
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
104
128/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Cooling
2. Follow the dialog step by step by connecting one pump after the other in the specified sequence to the mains distribution board (MDB) on the rear of the transmitter rack. Configuring fans 1. Under "Devices" > "Transmitter" > "Output Stage" > "Cooling", switch to the Task View and navigate further to "Install Fans". 2. Follow the dialog step by step by connecting one fan after the other in the specified sequence to the mains distribution board (MDB) on the rear of the transmitter rack. GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Value access
Displayed Rack
Used to select the rack for which the cooling system is to variable be configured.
Operation
Type
A distinction must be made between the following types: R&S Cooling, If the transmitter is connected to a 9000 series cool- Site Cooling, ● ing system, select "R&S Cooling". 8000 Cooling If the transmitter is connected to an existing site ● cooling system, use the "Site Cooling" setting. In this case, warning and fault signaling lines which are routed to terminal x8000 of the mains distribution board (MDB) are evaluated.
Configuration
Heat Exchangers / Rack Either 1 or 2 redundant heat exchangers can be used in 1 or 2 each rack. The set value affects fan monitoring and also the indicators on the user interface.
Configuration
Fans / Heat Exchanger
0 to 2
Configuration
Value range
Value access
Either one or two fans can be used for each heat exchanger. The set value affects fan monitoring and also the indicators on the user interface.
4.4.3
Status of Cooling System Cooling status parameters
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Sensor for inlet temperature
Indicates the status of the temperature sensor at the inlet Green: OK of the rack. If a fault is indicated, first check the connect- Red: Sensor ing cable between the sensor and the cooling interface Fault card in the TCE900 system control unit.
Read only
Sensor for outlet temperature
Indicates the status of the temperature sensor at the out- Green: OK let of the rack. Red: Sensor Fault
Read only
Sensor for coolant pres- Indicates the status of the pressure sensor. If a fault is Green: OK sure indicated, first check the connecting cable between the Red: Sensor sensor and the cooling interface card in the TCE900 sys- Fault tem control unit.
Read only
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
105
129/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Device View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Cooling
GUI name (external)
Help text (English)
Value range
Status of coolant filter
Indicates that the pump power is not sufficient to deliver Green: OK the required flow. With a correctly dimensioned and Yellow: Filter installed cooling system, this only occurs if the coolant Warning filter is blocked.
Sensor for overall status Indicates whether the temperature sensors and pressure Green: OK sensor are OK. A malfunction at the pressure sensor Yellow: results in a fault; a malfunction at a temperature sensor Warning results in a warning. Red: Fault
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Value access Read only
Read only
106
130/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
5 Task View Description 5.1 Basic Settings The structure of the transmitter system is configured in the "Basic Setup" menu. Each R&S®TCE900 is assigned its logical function together with the other R&S®TCE900 units, the physical installation position of the individual R&S®TCE900 units is set and the distribution of transmitters and R&S®TCE900 units in the racks is described. The basic settings are made for each R&S®TCE900 in the system and must be entered in the specified sequence: ●
Hardware equipment ("Boards" menu tab) The hardware modules which each R&S®TCE900 contains and at which position these modules are inserted in the R&S®TCE900 base unit must be configured for each R&S®TCE900.
●
Definition of the logical function The task that each R&S®TCE900 is to fulfill in the system must be defined.
●
Integration of the R&S®TCE900 in the transmitter system Depending on their function, some R&S®TCE900 units require additional information regarding: – system variant (MultiTx, n+1)
●
–
transmitter variant (Redundancy, Modulation, Amplifier Type)
–
assignment to a transmitter (Tx Number, Exciter A/B)
Physical structure of the transmitter system Depending on their function, some R&S®TCE900 units require additional information regarding: – total number of transmitter racks –
●
number of racks per transmitter
Physical installation location of the R&S®TCE900 units Each R&S®TCE900 must be assigned the following: – number of the rack in which the R&S®TCE900 is installed –
number of the installation slot within a rack
● Assignment of transmitters to racks ("Racks" menu tab)
Each R&S®TCE900 with the "Rack Control" function must be assigned those transmitters which are installed in the racks that the "Rack Control" function monitors. Changes to the basic settings only become effective when the R&S®TCE900 has been restarted. In the tables below, "?" means that it must be taken into consideration whether an air cooling interface (ACIF) or a Tx interface is installed. See the detailed description of the "Cooling Control" and "Rack Control" parameters in the table "Description of setting values".
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
107
131/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Assignment of logical functions Table 5-1: "Functions" for single-Tx systems (for TMU9 and TVU9 only) Transmitter type
System Control
Tx Control
Exciter
Cooling Con- Rack Control trol
X
X
X
?
?
Exciter A
X
X
X
?
?
Exciter B
-
X
X
-
-
System Control
X
-
-
?
?
Exciter A
-
X
X
-
-
Exciter B
-
X
X
-
-
Single drive Exciter Backup drive
Dual drive
Table 5-2: "Functions" for multi-Tx systems ( = 1 to 8) Transmitter type
System Control
Tx Control
Exciter
Cooling Con- Rack Control trol
System Control
X
-
-
?
X
Exciter (Tx )
-
X
X
-
-
System Control
X
-
-
?
X
Exciter A (Tx )
-
X
X
-
-
Exciter B (Tx )
-
X
X
-
-
Single drive
Dual drive
Table 5-3: "Functions" for N+1 systems ( = 1 to 8; TxB: = 9) Transmitter type
System Control
Tx Control
Exciter
Cooling Con- Rack Control trol
System Control
X
-
-
?
X
Exciter (Tx A, Tx B)
-
X
X
-
-
Rack Control (where applicable)
-
-
-
-
X
System Control
X
-
-
?
X
Exciter A (Tx A, Tx B)
-
X
X
-
-
Single drive
Dual drive
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
108
132/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Transmitter type
System Control
Tx Control
Exciter
Cooling Con- Rack Control trol
Exciter B (Tx A, Tx B)
-
X
X
-
-
Rack Control (where applicable)
-
-
-
-
X
Table 5-4: "Setup" for single-Tx systems (for TMU9 and TVU9 only) Transmitter type
System Variant
Tx Number
Exciter
Redundancy
No. of transmitters
Single Tx/multi Tx
A1
A
Single drive
1
Exciter A
Single Tx/multi Tx
A1
A
Backup drive
1
Exciter B
-
A1
B
Backup drive
1
System Control
Single Tx/multi Tx
-
-
-
1
Exciter A
-
A1
A
Dual drive
-
Exciter B
-
A1
B
Dual drive
-
Single drive Exciter Backup drive
Dual drive
Table 5-5: "Setup" for multi-Tx systems ( = 1 to 8) Transmitter type
System Variant
Tx ber Num-
Exciter
Redundancy
No. of transmitters
System Control
Single Tx/multi Tx
-
-
-
Exciter (Tx )
-
A
A
Single drive
-
System Control
Single Tx/multi Tx
-
-
-
Exciter A (Tx )
-
A
A
Dual drive
-
Exciter B (Tx )
-
A
B
Dual drive
-
Single drive
Dual drive
Table 5-6: "Setup" for N+1 systems ( = 1 to 8; TxB = 9) Transmitter type
System Variant
Tx Number
Exciter
Redundancy
No. of transmitters
System Control
N+1
-
-
Exciter (Tx A , Tx B)
-
A
A
Single drive
-
Single drive
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
109
133/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Transmitter type
System Variant
Tx Number
Exciter
Redundancy
No. of transmitters
Rack Control (where applicable)
-
-
-
-
System Control
N+1
-
-
-
Exciter A (Tx A , Tx B)
-
A
A
Dual drive
-
Exciter B (Tx A , Tx B)
-
A
B
Dual drive
-
Rack Control (where applicable)
-
-
-
-
-
Dual drive
Table 5-7: IP addresses for single-Tx systems (for TMU9 and TVU9 only) Transmitter type
Ethernet Local
Single drive
Exciter
192.168.58.100
Backup drive
Exciter A
192.168.58.11
Exciter B
192.168.58.12
Dual drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter A
192.168.58.11
Exciter B
192.168.58.12
Table 5-8: IP addresses for multi-Tx systems ( = 1 to 8) Transmitter type
Ethernet Local
Single drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter (Tx )
192.168.58.1
Dual drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter A (Tx )
192.168.58.1
Exciter B (Tx )
192.168.58.2
Table 5-9: IP addresses for N+1 systems ( = 1 to 8; TxB = 9; = 2 to 9, No. of Rack Controls) Transmitter type
Ethernet Local
Single drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
110
134/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Transmitter type
Ethernet Local
Exciter (Tx A, Tx B)
192.168.58.1
Rack Control (where applicable)
192.168.58.10
Dual drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter A (Tx A, Tx B)
192.168.58.1
Exciter B (Tx A, Tx B)
192.168.58.2
Rack Control (where applicable)
192.168.58.10
Table 5-10: Description of setting values Name
Description
System Control
Set this check mark if this cass ette of the R&S®TCE900 is Disabled, to function as a system control unit. In this case, all remote Enabled control interfaces and (if present) a R&S®TDU900 display unit must be connected to this R&S®TCE900. This R&S®TCE900 can also perform the function of the N+1 automatic system. In addition to functioning as a system control unit, other functions can also be assigned to the same R&S®TCE900 depending on the modules it contains.
Configuration
Tx Control
Set this check mark if this cassette of the R&S®TCE900 Disabled, cassette is to function as a transmitter control unit. The Enabled transmitter control unit contains, for example, the function for monitoring the output power and an automatic exciter switchover function (optional). In addition to functioning as a transmitter control unit, other functions can also be assigned to the same R&S®TCE900 depending on the modules it contains. This function must always be activated together with the "Exciter" function on the same R&S®TCE900.
Configuration
Exciter
Set this check mark if this R&S®TCE900 cassette contains Disabled, at least one coder board and one RF board. With a Enabled R&S®TCE900 which is configured as an exciter, the "Tx Control" function must be activated at the same time, unless the R&S®TCE900 exciter is to be operated as a stand‑alone instrument. In addition to functioning as an exciter, other functions can also be assigned to the same R&S®TCE900 depending on the modules it contains.
Configuration
Cooling Control
Set this check mark if this R&S®TCE900 cassette contains Disabled, at least one cooling interface. In addition to functioning as Enabled a cooling control unit, other functions can also be assigned to the same R&S®TCE900 depending on the modules it contains. With THx9, the "Cooling Control" function must always be activated together with the "Rack Control" function on the same R&S®TCE900. With TMx9, this function can be activated irrespective of "Rack Control".
Configuration
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Value range
Access right
111
135/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Name
Description
Value range
Rack Control
Set this check mark if this R&S®TCE900 is to monitor rack Disabled, components (e.g. overvoltage protection) or door contacts. Enabled
Access right Configuration
A "Tx Interface" module must be installed in the R&S®TCE900. With most system configurations, the Rack Control function is together with the System Control function on the same R&S®TCE900. The only exception are multirack N+1 systems in which more than one Rack Control are installed. With THx9, the "Rack Control" function must always be activated together with the "Cooling Control" function on the same R&S®TCE900. System Variant
Indicates whether the system is a single-Tx, multi-Tx or N +1 system.
Single/MultiTx, n+1
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is active. Tx Number
Indicates the transmitter to which this R&S®TCE900 is
Tx A1 to Tx A8 Configuration
assigned.
+ TxB
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" function is active. Exciter
Indicates whether this R&S®TCE900 is to operate as Exc A, Exc B exciter A or exciter B. The displayed value must correspond to the cabling of the two exciters at the exciter switch. Exciter A is shown in the case of single drive transmitters.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Exciter" function is active. ParIO
Indicates whether remote control has been activated by means of parallel contacts. ParIO 32/80 corresponds to a parallel remote‑control interface card with 32 inputs and 80
Off, 32/80, 9/12
Configuration
outputs. ParIO 9/12 corresponds to a parallel remote ‑control interface card with 9 inputs and 12 outputs. Remote control can be connected to a R&S®TCE900 with the System Control function. In the case of N+1 systems, it is also possible to connect remote control to a R&S®TCE900 with the Tx Control function, but certain restrictions will then apply. The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" or "Tx Control" function is active. Redundancy
Indicates which redundancy method is supported by this Single Drive, transmitter. Dual Drive, Single Drive: Backup Drive ● The transmitter contains one exciter. Dual Drive: ● The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active exciter fails, an automatic switchover function switches the system over to the standby exciter. Only available with some system variants: Backup ● Drive The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active exciter fails, an automatic switchover function switches the system over to the standby exciter.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" function is active.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
112
136/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Name
Description
Value range
Transmitters
Indicates how many transmitters the system contains. The 1 to 8 B transmitter of an N+1 system is not included here.
Access right Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is active. Modulation
Indicates the modulation mode of the exciter. An appropri- DVB-T2, Configuration ate software option must additionally be installed for the DVB-T, ISDBdisplayed modulation mode. T, ATSC, ATV The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active.
Rack Number
Indicates the rack in which the R&S®TCE900 module is installed. The left-hand rack is assigned the number 1.
1 to 18
Configuration
Broadband, Doherty
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control", "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active. Amplifier Mode
Indicates whether the amplifiers are to be operated in broadband or Doherty mode. To operate the amplifiers in Doherty mode, the frequency ranges of the amplifiers must be set to the transmit frequency. This display only applies to amplifier types which support Doherty mode. The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active.
Amplifiers
Indicates the total number of amplifiers per output stage of 1 to 24 this transmitter. Whether the amplifiers are housed in one or more racks is irrelevant. Up to 24 amplifiers per output stage are supported.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" function is active. Amplifier Type Indicates the amplifier type used in the transmitter. PHU901: ● High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled. PMU901: ● Medium‑power amplifier, UHF, air ‑cooled with Doherty mode. PHU902: ● High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled with Doherty mode. PHV902: ● High‑power amplifier, VHF, liquid ‑cooled with Doherty mode. PMV901: ● Medium‑power amplifier, VHF, air ‑cooled with Doherty mode.
PHU901, PMU901, PHU902, PHV902, PMV901
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active. Slot Number
Indicates the position at which the R&S®TCE900 is instal- 1 to 12 led in the respective rack. In the THU9, position 1 is the lefthand slot; in the TMU9, position 1 is the top slot.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control", "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
113
137/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Racks/Rack Control
Indicates how many racks are monitored by this R&S®TCE900. Transmitters with more than 12 amplifiers
1 or 2
Configuration
Liquid, Air
Configuration
monitor 2 racks with one rack control. With all other transmitters, this value must be set to 1. The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control" function is active. Cooling Type
Indicates the type of cooling system. The displayed value must be suitable for the amplifier type. Further settings are made in the "Home" > "Cooling" > "Task View" > "Setup Cooling" menu.
Racks/System
Indicates the total number of racks contained in the system. 1 to 18
Racks/Tx
Indicates the number of racks that the transmitter consists 1 to 4 of. This setting is only relevant for THU9 transmitters with more than 12 amplifiers. In all other cases, the value 1 must be set here.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is active. Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" function is active. Number of Rack Controls
Indicates the total number of rack controls which are active 1 to 9 in the system.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control" function is active. Int. RF Sensor Indicates whether the internal RF test point of the amplifier Off, On is to be used for measuring the transmit power.
Configuration
The setting is only relevant for "Amplifier Type = PMU901". The value "On" should be set if the transmitter consists of exactly one amplifier and no CAN bus test point is installed in the transmitter. The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control" function is active. Configuration
Indicates whether the selected combination of settings is valid and non‑conflicting.
OK, not Valid
Read only
The setting can be changed here. Reboot
Reboots this R&S®TCE900. Changes to settings in this and the other menu tabs of the Basic Config menu only become effective after a reboot.
Configuration
IP Address (Local IP Settings)
Used to set the IP address of the R&S®TCE900 for internal communication with other R&S®TCE900 units in this system. When the system is supplied, the internal IP addresses begin with 192.168.58. The last group of digits differs according to the following rule: System Control: 100 ● Tx Control + Exciter: 11/12 (= TxA1, Exciter A/B) to ● 81/82 (= TxA8, Exciter A/B); 91/92 (= TXB, Exciter A/ B) Rack Control (second rack): 101 ●
Configuration
The setting can be changed here.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
114
138/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Parameters: Input Configuration
Name
Description
Value range
IP Address (Remote IP
Used to set the IP address of the TCE900 system control. The settings depend on the network infrastructure.
Used to determine which module is contained in each installation slot of the R&S®TCE900 unit. Basically, any module can be inserted into any installation slot. The rack cabling has, however, been optimized for installation of the modules in the following slots: Slot A (bottom left): RF board or Tx interface ● Slot B (top center): Cooling interface (CIF or ACIF) or ● ATV interface Slot C (bottom center): Reserved for receiver module ● Slot CD (top right): Coder board or LAN switch ●
Coder Board, RFBoard, TxIf, CoolingIf, LANSwitchIf, ATVIf, CIF, ACIF
Access right
Settings) Slot Config
Configuration
The setting can be changed here.
5.2 Parameters: Input Configuration GUI name (exter- Help text (English) nal)
Value range
Value access
Input Source
Here, you can configure the input interfaces used for two inputs, indevariable pendently of each other. To test the "seamless switching" function, it is possible to select the same input interface for both inputs. The selection options of the data sources are determined by the installed Input Interfaces and option keys.
Maintenance
Multiplex Name
Here, youstream. can assign desired name for contained this transport Thisany name is displayed in the the multiplex transmitter overviewinand, for n+1 systems, in the automatic transmitter.
Maintenance
Mute (on Input Fail)
Here, you can configure the operating behavior when the active input fails. This parameter is available in MFN operating mode only. No – In the operating mode, the output signal is not suppressed if ● the active input fails. Null packets are output instead. Yes - If the active input fails, the output signal is suppressed. ●
Maintenance
Input Fail Delay
Used to set a delay time which must elapse following an input signal fail- ure before the output signal is s uppressed and a sum fault is generated.
Maintenance
Force Exciter Changeover
Here it can be determined whether switchover to another redundant exciter is to take place if the input signal fails. This function is available for all redundancy systems (dual drive, backup exciter and n+1). Yes - In the "Yes" position, an exciter fault is signaled to the ● higher ‑level redundancy control unit which decides whether to switch over to another exciter or transmitter. No - In the "No" position, no switchover takes place. ●
Yes, No
Maintenance
Monitor Out
Here, for measuring purposes, you can send any input signal to the TS Monitor-Out jack (X22). The selection options of the data sources are determined by the installed Input Interfaces and option keys.
Maintenance
IP Stream
Indicates whether a valid data stream is fed to the transmitter via the IP feed. If an error is indicated, check the settings of the IP stream and the Ethernet interface.
Query
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
No, Yes
115
139/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Parameters: Input Configuration
GUI name (exter- Help text (English) nal)
Value range
Value access
TS Stream
Query
Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is fed to the transmitter via TS1/2 IN (X20/X21). If an error is displayed here, first check the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE).
RJ45 Connector
Here, define the physical network interface to which the logical IP stream ● ● is bound. Normally, the TS LAN 1(X30) jack is coupled to IP Stream 1 and TS LAN 2(X31) is coupled to IP Stream 2. This allows you to use multiple redundant servers that can be selected automatically using the automatic input signal switchover. However, it is also possible to select multiple multicast streams via the same physical Ethernet jack. In this case, too, the automatic input signal switchover can toggle automatically between two data streams.
TS LAN1 TS LAN2
Maintenance
Streaming Mode
This configures the type of network streaming. ● Unicast: The multiplex sends the suitable IP stream to the IP address ● ● of the TV transmitter in a targeted manner.
Unicast Multicast
Maintenance
●
Multicast: The TV transmitter subscribes to a Multicast IP stream that can be provided by the Multiplexer in the feed network to multiple transmitters at the same time.
Multicast Address The function of this menu item varies depending on the selected stream- ing mode: for Unicast: displays the local IP address of the selected input X30 ● or X31. for Multicast: used to set the multicast address of the required gate● way server (data transmitter).
Maintenance
Port
Used to set the port number under which the transport stream is expected.
Maintenance
Protocol
Select the network protocol used here. UDP (User Datagram Protocol) for easy connectionless communi● cation. RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol) for packet-oriented communica● tions.
Maintenance
Packet Lock
Indicates that a signal has been detected at this input.
Read only
Packet Length
Indicates the dedicated packet length of the transport stream.
Read only
Gross IP data rate Shows the total data rate at the IP feed.
Read only
TS State
Indicates whether a valid serial data stream is fed to the transmitter via the TS1/2 IN (X20/X21) jacks. If an error is displayed here, first check the setting of the TS type (ASI/SMPTE).
Read only
Type
Used to set the data format for the data streams at X20 and X21.
●
Auto
AUTO: Data format is detected automatically ASI: Manual setting for an ASI transport stream SMPTE: Manual setting for an SMPTE transport stream
● ●
ASI SMPTE
● ● ● Gross TS Datarate
Shows the total data rate at the TS feed.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Maintenance
Read only
116
140/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Task View Description System Control
5.3 System Control
5.3.1
5.3.1.1
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
General Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is used for monitoring and controlling different units in a network. A description of the unit – the management information base (MIB) – must be loaded in the central unit ("manager") from which the transmitters are monitored. A monitored unit contains a program ("agent") which can answer queries from the manager and execute commands. Furthermore, the agent may of its own accord generate a message (called a notification, alarm or trap) and send it to the manager. In this way, the central unit can be informed of a fault. The MIBs required for monitoring and controlling a transmitter are stored as a ZIP archive in every R&S TCE900. From there, they can be downloaded with any web browser. When the transmitter is put into operation, both the agent in the transmitter and the manager must be configured. Additional steps may be necessary if the transmitter is connected via routers, firewalls or similar devices as they may block data packets.
5.3.1.2
Settings on Transmitter Side You can make settings yourself via the local R&S TDU900 display (if available), the web server or SNMP. The Task View > System Control > SNMP menu contains all the settings that are required for accessing a transmitter. Changes to these settings are adopted immediately. The instrument does not need to be restarted.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
117
141/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Task View Description System Control
Fig. 5-1: SNMP menu.
The XX9 transmitter family supports the versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c. Alarms can be sent as v1Traps, v2Traps or v2Informs. Several destinations for error messages (trapsinks) and several communities can be set with read only authorization and read/ write authorization. SNMP is a protocol for remote control and is offered only at the remote Ethernet interface (X2 – 1000 BaseT). The system or transmitter has to be set to remote to execute SET commands. 5.3.1.3
Settings on Manager Side The basic SNMP settings (port, community) have to match on the manager side and transmitter side. You typically define these settings for each IP address in your program (e.g. MIB browser). The SNMP version is also set in the manager; the transmitter then detects this automatically. Subsequently, SNMP communication should already be functioning at a basic level.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
118
142/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Control
Fig. 5-2: SNMP manager settings.
Being able to monitor and control a transmitter with SNMP requires MIB of the instrument on the manager side and a program which can interpret the MIB. You can load all available MIBs from any instrument using a web browser. ●
Log in using the WebGUI and select the menu Task View > System Control > Downloads > Download SNMP MIBs
●
Save the mibs.zip file to your computer
●
Load the following MIBs in the MIB browser: – RS-COMMON-MIB –
RS-XX9-SMI-MIB and RS-XX9-TC-MIB
–
RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB
–
MIB of the standby concept, standard or option
A detailed description of the MIBs, the information that they contain and the associated options is given below. MIBs from Rohde & Schwarz and IRT are available. MIBs from IRT allow transmitters to be linked using SNMP irrespective of the manufacturer. They are, however, limited with respect to their functionality. Some particular features to keep in mind when using IRT MIBs are listed in the document "SoftwareMiniSpecification – SNMP for XX9". The MIBs have the naming convention RS-XX9--MIB. Examples include: RS-XX9-DVBT2-MIB for DVB-T2 and RS-XX9-AIR-COOLINGMIB for air cooling.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
119
143/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Control
Examples of MIBs and content
5.3.1.4
MIB
Description
RS-COMMON-MIB
Contains general Rohde & Schwarz definitions
RS-XX9-SMI-MIB
Contains top-level definitions of other XX9 MIBs
RS-XX9-TC-MIB
Contains definitions for textual conventions used in other MIBs
RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB
Contains definitions that comply with all of the transmitters from the XX9 family (e.g. configuration)
RF-XX9-TX-MIB
Contains definitions for single transmitters not dependent on the TV standard
RF-XX9-MAX-MIB
Contains definitions for MultiTx and N+1 systems
Which MIBs Must be Used? The instrument can be queried by SNMP in order to find out which MIBs have been implemented. This information is contained in the table "sysORTable" (OID .iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).mgmt(2).mib-2(1).system(1).sysORTable(9) of the SNMPv2 MIB). There is a corresponding MIB for each type of modulation.
Fig. 5-3: sysORTable display.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
120
144/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Control
5.3.1.5
MIB
Description
RF-XX9-COMMON-MIB
This MIB contains general data that supports every unit: - Transmitter configuration, option keys, SNMP configuration software update, triggering a test notification: This information always applies to the instrument monitored using SNMP.
RF-XX9-TX-MIB
This MIB contains parameters independent of the type of modulation for: - The standby concepts "single transmitter", "passive exciter standby", "active output-stage standby" - all power classes (medium-power and high-power).
RF-XX9-MAX-MIB
This MIB contains parameters independent of the type of modulation for: MultiTx ● N+1 ●
RF-XX9-LIQUIDCOOLING-MIB
This MIB contains parameters for liquid-cooled transmitters, either with internal Rohde & Schwarz cooling or with (external) station cooling.
RF-XX9-AIRCOOLING-MIB
This MIB contains parameters for air-cooled transmitters.
DRS-XX9-DVBTMIB
This MIB contains parameters for DVB-T signal processing.
RS-XX9-DVBT2MIB
This MIB contains parameters for DVB-T2 signal processing.
Which OIDs from a MIB Must be Used? Different parameters are available depending on the system being queried. Thus for example txExcAutoOperationMode (in RS-XX9-TX-MIB) returns the response NoSuchName when you query a single transmitter, since it has no automatic exciter switchover. It easy to findfor outautomatic which parameters are valid by checking thetxExcAutoOperationMode conformance statements. Inis the example exciter switchover above, the OID is contained in the txObjsExciterAutomatic object group. For N+1 systems this also means that unavailable parameters may receive the response NoSuchName, e.g. parameters from the transmitter A8 if only a 4+1 system is present..
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
121
145/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Task View Description System Control
Fig. 5-4: Groups display.
5.3.1.6
Setting Alarms Parameters which allow configuration of the transmitter alarms can be found under the OID "commonSnmpConfiguration". For example, it is possible to switch off the IRT alarms (factory default setting: on) and to switch on R&S alarms (factory default setting: off). The transmitter-specific alarms offer an extensive range of configuration possibilities. In addition, it is also possible to assign a freely selectable priority and to check the current status. Since the Rohde & Schwarz MIBs contain a very large number of alarms, three predefined groups for faults, warnings and information exist to which all alarms are assigned. For each alarm, the respective alarm class is given in the binding AlarmClass. A possible and recommended configuration would therefore be to disable the IRT alarms and to enable the Rohde & Schwarz alarms of the fault class:
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
122
146/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Control
●
irtNotificationsAllOff: OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.1.3.3.0
●
rsNotificationsAllFaultsOn: OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.1.3.6.0
The example shows alarm class fault (1) for the alarm "txSummaryFault" (transmitter sum fault). Alarms are always collected in the Notifications branch in the MIBs. They always have at least three bindings. ● Alarm class: predefined, fixed alarm class ●
Priority: freely selectable priority
●
State: current state of the alarm
"State" is defined in NotificationState in the MIB RS-XX9-TC-MIB: undefined(1)
State is not available
off(2)
Alarm is inactive or not available
fault(3)
Alarm corresponds to an error
warning(4)
Alarm corresponds to a warning
ok(5)
Alarm does not correspond to either an error or a warning or alarm is OK
Matching the alarms, there are one or more NotificationTables in the MIBs on the Objects branch. Information is displayed together there. 5.3.1.7
Testing the SNMP Communication In the following example, a transmitter with the IP address 172.29.12.43 queries the OID sendTestNotification (1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.1.3.1). The response from the agent is "idle(1)". Using a further test, you can check whether the transmitter sends an alarm message in the event of an error and whether this message reaches the alarm destinations. To do so, set an OID sendTestNotification to the value of 2 (trigger), which triggers a commonTest trap (1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.216.2.0.1000). This alarm is sent to all receivers which have been entered for the alarms (trapsinks, see above). This type of error message functions in a slightly different way than that used for querying and setting values (default: UDP Port 161 for SET/GET and UDP Port 162 for alarms). The following image shows that the testTrap has been received correctly by the tce900-100100 unit (serial number 100100).
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
123
147/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Task View Description System Control
Fig. 5-5: testTrap display.
5.3.1.8
Setting Alarms Using SNMP As an alternative to a web browser, you can also configure trapsinks with SNMP as well. The procedure is described in RFC 3413.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
124
148/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Control
Fig. 5-6: TargetTables display.
There are three tables to be used: snmpNotifyTable, snmpTargetAddrTable and snmpTargetParamsTable: ●
snmpNotifyType: trap(1) oder inform(2)
●
snmpTargetAddrTDomain / snmpTargetAddrTAddress: Address snmpTargetAddrTDomain: 1.3.6.1.6.1.1 (snmpUDPDomain), this makes snmpTargetAddrTAddress 6 octets; the first 4 octets correspond to the IP address and the last two to the UDP port
●
snmpTargetAddrTimeout, snmpTargetAddrRetryCount: Additional settings for inform
●
snmpTargetParamsMPModel: 0 (SNMPv1) or 1 (SNMPv2c)
●
snmpTargetParamsSecurityModel: currently just 2 (SNMPv2c)
●
nmpTargetParamsSecurityName: example public
●
snmpTargetParamsSecurityLevel: Currently just noAuthNoPriv(1)
The SNMP agent uses the following default values: snmpNotifyName
rsdef1
rsdef2
snmpNotifyTag trap inform
trap
inform
snmpNotifyType trap(1) inform (2)
trap(1)
inform (2)
snmpNotifyStorageType nonVolatile(3) nonVolatile(3)
nonVolatile(3)
nonVolatile(3)
snmpNotifyRowStatus readOnly (5) readOnly (5)
readOnly
readOnly(5)
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
125
149/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
System Control
5.3.1.9
getAddrName
target1
to
target5
snmpTargetAddrTDomain
3.6.1.6.1.1
1.3.6.1.6.1.1
snmpTargetAddrTAddress
0x0101010100a2
0x0101010100a2
snmpTargetAddrTimeout
1500
1500
snmpTargetAddrRetryCount
3
3
snmpTargetAddrTagList
trap
trap
snmpTargetAddrParams
param2
param2
snmpTargetAddrStorageType
permanent(4)
permanent(4)
snmpTargetAddrRowStatus
notInService(2)
notInService(2)
snmpTargetParamsName
param1
param2
snmpTargetParamsMPModel
0
1
snmpTargetParamsSecurityModel
1
2
snmpTargetParamsSecurityName
public
public
snmpTargetParamsSecurityLevel
nNoPriv(1)
noAuthNoPriv(1)
snmpTargetParamsStorageType
permanent(4)
permanent(4)
snmpTargetParamsRowStatus
active(1)
active(1)
Type plates - the ENTITY MIB The ENTITY MIB contains information on type plates. The table commonEntPhysicalTable in RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB serves as an extension of this. It includes values such as operating hour meters and the number of restarts. The following image shows an excerpt from the table entPhysicalTable of the ENTITY MIB.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
126
150/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Task View Description System Control
Fig. 5-7: entPhysicalTable display (excerpt).
The extension of the entPhysicalTable in RS-XX9-COMMON-MIB (commonEntPhysicalTable):
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
127
151/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Maintenance
Fig. 5-8: commonEntPhysicalTable display
5.4 Maintenance The Maintain Software operating element allows you to carry out the following tasks. ●
Backup / Restore
● ●
Software Update Maintenance
5.4.1 Backup / Restore In the SW Backup/Restore menu you can save the software and all TCE900 module settings as a backup file and also read in the entire file again. The backup is saved to the FlashCard of the respective R&S TCE900 modules. A backup can be read in only if the backup is valid (i.e. File Status is OK). To start the Backup/Restore function, follow this procedure:
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
128
152/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Maintenance
1. Navigate to the following destination using the menu bar: "Tasks" > "Maintain Software" 2. The following functions and displays are available in the tab Backup/Restore: a) for Backup/Restore: ● Backup State ● Start Backup ● Start Restore b) for File Info: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
File State Name Part Number Serial Number Device Name Host Name Date/Time SW/FW/Bios Number
This function is not available in all software versions.
5.4.2 Software Update To perform a software update, the R&S TCE900 unit must be connected to a PC on which the respective updates and the corresponding update software (R&S Software Distributor) are ready. Before the R&S Software Distributor is called on the PC, the R&S TCE900 must be moved into update mode using the Start Update button (for Manual update mode). In Permanent update mode, the update procedure is started automatically. When the R&S Software Distributor is called, the software automatically analyzes which updates need to be installed. The update procedure is started using the R&S Software Distributor. After the software update has been completed, the R&S TCE900 must be restarted (see chapter 5.4.3, "Maintenance", on page 130). To start the Software Update function, follow this procedure: 1. Navigate to the following destination using the menu bar: "Tasks" > "Maintain Software" 2. The following functions and displays are available in the tab SW Update: ● ● ● ● ●
Update Mode Current Version Software Update Firmware Update Device Name
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
129
153/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Maintenance
●
Device Group
Note: A detailed description of the parameters can be found in . 3. Start the software update by selecting the "Start Update" button.
5.4.3
Maintenance To start the maintenance functions, follow this procedure: 1. Navigate to the following destination using the menu bar: "Tasks" > "Maintain Software" 2. The following buttons are available in the tab Maintenance: ●
Reboot
●
If the instrument is rebooted, the software of the TCE module is restarted, after which it runs in the same operating mode. Cold Boot For a cold boot, the TCE module is restarted, after which it is an unconfigured state. Then, the TCE module must be reconfigured once again.
3. Start the desired function by selecting the corresponding button.
Cold Boot For a cold boot, all settings are deleted, after which the TCE is in an unconfigured state.
5.4.4
Options Under "Options" it is possible to activate additional features on a transmitter. The features requested when a transmitter was ordered are activated at the factory before the transmitter is delivered. Additional features can be purchased at any time from your local Rohde & Schwarz sales partner. Options are stored on a SIM card inside the R&S®TCE and are always valid for the R&S®TCE inthe which SIM card is installed. Options can be transferred to another TCE by swapping SIMthe card. The Task View (Home) > Options > Status menu provides an overview of the available or installed options. In addition to permanent options, there are also temporary options. These options deactivate automatically after a certain period of time. The period of validity of temporary options is shown in the Task View (Home) > Options > Details menu. Features are enabled by installing a valid activation key in the Task View (Home) > Options > Manage Keys menu.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
130
154/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Task View Description
R&S THU9/TMU9
Maintenance
"Manage Keys" parameters ●
Path:Task View (Home) > Options > Manage Keys
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Option Key (Install/Deinstall)
Used to enter an activation key.
30 characters
Maintenance
Message (Install/ Deinstall)
●
Please enter a key, Key OK, Invalid format
Read only
●
●
Please enter a key Prompt to enter a key. Key OK The key has been entered successfully (the display changes back to "Please enter a key" after a few moments). Invalid format The entered key was invalid.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
131
155/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Task View Description Maintenance
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
132
156/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
6 Operating the Device Manager Using Device Manager, type plates of all TCE900 units and the type plates of the the modules they containthe candevice be polled. The type plates contain information about the current software version of programmable modules and all necessary information for spare parts procurement. The Device Manager is started using the "Device Manager" button on the system, transmitter or exciter level.
6.1 Basic Settings The structure of the transmitter system is configured in the "Basic Setup" menu. Each R&S®TCE900 is assigned its logical function together with the other R&S®TCE900 units, the physical installation position of the individual R&S®TCE900 units is set and the distribution of transmitters and R&S®TCE900 units in the racks is described. The basic settings are made for each R&S®TCE900 in the system and must be entered in the specified sequence: ●
Hardware equipment ("Boards" menu tab) The hardware modules which each R&S®TCE900 contains and at which position these modules are inserted in the R&S®TCE900 base unit must be configured for each R&S®TCE900.
●
Definition of the logical function The task that each R&S®TCE900 is to fulfill in the system must be defined.
●
Integration of the R&S®TCE900 in the transmitter system Depending on their function, some R&S®TCE900 units require additional information regarding: – system variant (MultiTx, n+1)
●
–
transmitter variant (Redundancy, Modulation, Amplifier Type)
–
assignment to a transmitter (Tx Number, Exciter A/B)
Physical structure of the transmitter system Depending on their function, some R&S®TCE900 units require additional information regarding: – –
●
total number of transmitter racks number of racks per transmitter
Physical installation location of the R&S®TCE900 units Each R&S®TCE900 must be assigned the following: – number of the rack in which the R&S®TCE900 is installed –
number of the installation slot within a rack
● Assignment of transmitters to racks ("Racks" menu tab) Each R&S®TCE900 with the "Rack Control" function must be assigned those transmitters which are installed in the racks that the "Rack Control" function monitors.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
133
157/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Changes to the basic settings only become effective when the R&S®TCE900 has been restarted. In the tables below, "?" means that it must be taken into consideration whether an air cooling interface (ACIF) or a Tx interface is installed. See the detailed description of the "Cooling Control" and "Rack Control" parameters in the table "Description of setting values". Assignment of logical functions Table 6-1: "Functions" for single-Tx systems (for TMU9 and TVU9 only) Transmitter type
System Control
Tx Control
Exciter
Cooling Con- Rack Control trol
X
X
X
?
?
Exciter A
X
X
X
?
?
Exciter B
-
X
X
-
-
System Control
X
-
-
?
?
Exciter A
-
X
X
-
-
Exciter B
-
X
X
-
-
Single drive Exciter Backup drive
Dual drive
Table 6-2: "Functions" for multi-Tx systems ( = 1 to 8) Transmitter type
System Control
Tx Control
Exciter
Cooling Con- Rack Control trol
System Control
X
-
-
?
X
Exciter (Tx )
-
X
X
-
-
System Control
X
-
-
?
X
Exciter A (Tx )
-
X
X
-
-
Exciter B (Tx )
-
X
X
-
-
Single drive
Dual drive
Table 6-3: "Functions" for N+1 systems ( = 1 to 8; TxB: = 9) Transmitter type
System Control
Tx Control
Exciter
Cooling Con- Rack Control trol
System Control
X
-
-
?
X
Exciter (Tx A, Tx B)
-
X
X
-
-
Single drive
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
134
158/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Transmitter type
System Control
Tx Control
Exciter
Cooling Con- Rack Control trol
Rack Control (where
-
-
-
-
X
System Control
X
-
-
?
X
Exciter A (Tx A, Tx B)
-
X
X
-
-
Exciter B (Tx A, Tx B)
-
X
X
-
-
Rack Control (where applicable)
-
-
-
-
X
applicable) Dual drive
Table 6-4: "Setup" for single-Tx systems (for TMU9 and TVU9 only) Transmitter type
System Variant
Tx Number
Exciter
Redundancy
No. of transmitters
Single Tx/multi Tx
A1
A
Single drive
1
Exciter A
Single Tx/multi Tx
A1
A
Backup drive
1
Exciter B
-
A1
B
Backup drive
1
System Control
Single Tx/multi Tx
-
-
-
1
Exciter A
-
A1
A
Dual drive
-
Exciter B
-
A1
B
Dual drive
-
Single drive Exciter Backup drive
Dual drive
Table 6-5: "Setup" for multi-Tx systems ( = 1 to 8) Transmitter type
System Variant
Tx Number
Exciter
Redundancy
No. of transmitters
System Control
Single Tx/multi Tx
-
-
-
Exciter (Tx )
-
A
A
Single drive
-
System Control
Single Tx/multi Tx
-
-
-
Exciter A (Tx )
-
A
A
Dual drive
-
Exciter B (Tx )
-
A
B
Dual drive
-
Single drive
Dual drive
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
135
159/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Table 6-6: "Setup" for N+1 systems ( = 1 to 8; TxB = 9) Transmitter type
System Variant
Tx Number
Exciter
Redundancy
No. of transmitters
System Control
N+1
-
-
Exciter (Tx A , Tx B)
-
A
A
Single drive
-
Rack Control (where applicable)
-
-
-
-
System Control
N+1
-
-
-
Exciter A (Tx A , Tx B)
-
A
A
Dual drive
-
Exciter B (Tx A , Tx B)
-
A
B
Dual drive
-
Rack Control (where applicable)
-
-
-
-
-
Single drive
Dual drive
Table 6-7: IP addresses for single-Tx systems (for TMU9 and TVU9 only) Transmitter type
Ethernet Local
Single drive
Exciter
192.168.58.100
Backup drive
Exciter A
192.168.58.11
Exciter B
192.168.58.12
Dual drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter A
192.168.58.11
Exciter B
192.168.58.12
Table 6-8: IP addresses for multi-Tx systems ( = 1 to 8) Transmitter type
Ethernet Local
Single drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter (Tx )
192.168.58.1
Dual drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter A (Tx )
192.168.58.1
Exciter B (Tx )
192.168.58.2
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
136
160/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Table 6-9: IP addresses for N+1 systems ( = 1 to 8; TxB = 9; = 2 to 9, No. of Rack Controls) Transmitter type
Ethernet Local
Single drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter (Tx A, Tx B)
192.168.58.1
Rack Control (where applicable)
192.168.58.10
Dual drive
System Control
192.168.58.100
Exciter A (Tx A, Tx B)
192.168.58.1
Exciter B (Tx A, Tx B)
192.168.58.2
Rack Control (where applicable)
192.168.58.10
Table 6-10: Description of setting values Name
Description
System Control
Set this check mark if this cass ette of the R&S®TCE900 is Disabled, to function as a system control unit. In this case, all remote Enabled control interfaces and (if present) a R&S®TDU900 display unit must be connected to this R&S®TCE900. This R&S®TCE900 can also perform the function of the N+1 automatic system. In addition to functioning as a system control unit, other functions can also be assigned to the same R&S®TCE900 depending on the modules it contains.
Configuration
Tx Control
Set this check mark if this cassette of the R&S®TCE900 Disabled, cassette is to function as a transmitter control unit. The Enabled transmitter control unit contains, for example, the function for monitoring the output power and an automatic exciter switchover function (optional). In addition to functioning as a transmitter control unit, other functions can also be assigned to the same R&S®TCE900 depending on the modules it contains. This function must always be activated together with the "Exciter" function on the same R&S®TCE900.
Configuration
Exciter
Set this check mark if this R&S®TCE900 cassette contains Disabled, at least one coder board and one RF board. With a Enabled R&S®TCE900 which is configured as an exciter, the "Tx Control" function must be activated at the same time, unless the R&S®TCE900 exciter is to be operated as a stand‑alone instrument. In addition to functioning as an exciter, other functions can also be assigned to the same R&S®TCE900 depending on the modules it contains.
Configuration
Cooling Control
Set this check mark if this R&S®TCE900 cassette contains Disabled, at least one cooling interface. In addition to functioning as Enabled a cooling control unit, other functions can also be assigned to the same R&S®TCE900 depending on the modules it contains. With THx9, the "Cooling Control" function must always be activated together with the "Rack Control" function on the same R&S®TCE900. With TMx9, this function can be activated irrespective of "Rack Control".
Configuration
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
Value range
Access right
137
161/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Name
Description
Value range
Rack Control
Set this check mark if this R&S®TCE900 is to monitor rack Disabled, components (e.g. overvoltage protection) or door contacts. Enabled
Access right Configuration
A "Tx Interface" module must be installed in the R&S®TCE900. With most system configurations, the Rack Control function is together with the System Control function on the same R&S®TCE900. The only exception are multirack N+1 systems in which more than one Rack Control are installed. With THx9, the "Rack Control" function must always be activated together with the "Cooling Control" function on the same R&S®TCE900. System Variant
Indicates whether the system is a single-Tx, multi-Tx or N +1 system.
Single/MultiTx, n+1
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is active. Tx Number
Indicates the transmitter to which this R&S®TCE900 is
Tx A1 to Tx A8 Configuration
assigned.
+ TxB
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" function is active. Exciter
Indicates whether this R&S®TCE900 is to operate as Exc A, Exc B exciter A or exciter B. The displayed value must correspond to the cabling of the two exciters at the exciter switch. Exciter A is shown in the case of single drive transmitters.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Exciter" function is active. ParIO
Indicates whether remote control has been activated by means of parallel contacts. ParIO 32/80 corresponds to a parallel remote‑control interface card with 32 inputs and 80
Off, 32/80, 9/12
Configuration
outputs. ParIO 9/12 corresponds to a parallel remote ‑control interface card with 9 inputs and 12 outputs. Remote control can be connected to a R&S®TCE900 with the System Control function. In the case of N+1 systems, it is also possible to connect remote control to a R&S®TCE900 with the Tx Control function, but certain restrictions will then apply. The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" or "Tx Control" function is active. Redundancy
Indicates which redundancy method is supported by this Single Drive, transmitter. Dual Drive, Single Drive: Backup Drive ● The transmitter contains one exciter. Dual Drive: ● The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active exciter fails, an automatic switchover function switches the system over to the standby exciter. Only available with some system variants: Backup ● Drive The transmitter contains two exciters. If the active exciter fails, an automatic switchover function switches the system over to the standby exciter.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" function is active.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
138
162/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Name
Description
Value range
Transmitters
Indicates how many transmitters the system contains. The 1 to 8 B transmitter of an N+1 system is not included here.
Access right Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is active. Modulation
Indicates the modulation mode of the exciter. An appropri- DVB-T2, Configuration ate software option must additionally be installed for the DVB-T, ISDBdisplayed modulation mode. T, ATSC, ATV The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active.
Rack Number
Indicates the rack in which the R&S®TCE900 module is installed. The left-hand rack is assigned the number 1.
1 to 18
Configuration
Broadband, Doherty
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control", "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active. Amplifier Mode
Indicates whether the amplifiers are to be operated in broadband or Doherty mode. To operate the amplifiers in Doherty mode, the frequency ranges of the amplifiers must be set to the transmit frequency. This display only applies to amplifier types which support Doherty mode. The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active.
Amplifiers
Indicates the total number of amplifiers per output stage of 1 to 24 this transmitter. Whether the amplifiers are housed in one or more racks is irrelevant. Up to 24 amplifiers per output stage are supported.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" function is active. Amplifier Type Indicates the amplifier type used in the transmitter. PHU901: ● High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled. PMU901: ● Medium‑power amplifier, UHF, air ‑cooled with Doherty mode. PHU902: ● High‑power amplifier, UHF, liquid‑cooled with Doherty mode. PHV902: ● High‑power amplifier, VHF, liquid ‑cooled with Doherty mode. PMV901: ● Medium‑power amplifier, VHF, air ‑cooled with Doherty mode.
PHU901, PMU901, PHU902, PHV902, PMV901
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active. Slot Number
Indicates the position at which the R&S®TCE900 is instal- 1 to 12 led in the respective rack. In the THU9, position 1 is the lefthand slot; in the TMU9, position 1 is the top slot.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control", "Tx Control" or "Exciter" function is active.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
139
163/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Name
Description
Value range
Access right
Racks/Rack Control
Indicates how many racks are monitored by this R&S®TCE900. Transmitters with more than 12 amplifiers
1 or 2
Configuration
Liquid, Air
Configuration
monitor 2 racks with one rack control. With all other transmitters, this value must be set to 1. The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control" function is active. Cooling Type
Indicates the type of cooling system. The displayed value must be suitable for the amplifier type. Further settings are made in the "Home" > "Cooling" > "Task View" > "Setup Cooling" menu.
Racks/System
Indicates the total number of racks contained in the system. 1 to 18
Racks/Tx
Indicates the number of racks that the transmitter consists 1 to 4 of. This setting is only relevant for THU9 transmitters with more than 12 amplifiers. In all other cases, the value 1 must be set here.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "System Control" function is active. Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Tx Control" function is active. Number of Rack Controls
Indicates the total number of rack controls which are active 1 to 9 in the system.
Configuration
The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control" function is active. Int. RF Sensor Indicates whether the internal RF test point of the amplifier Off, On is to be used for measuring the transmit power.
Configuration
The setting is only relevant for "Amplifier Type = PMU901". The value "On" should be set if the transmitter consists of exactly one amplifier and no CAN bus test point is installed in the transmitter. The setting can be changed here if the "Rack Control" function is active. Configuration
Indicates whether the selected combination of settings is valid and non‑conflicting.
OK, not Valid
Read only
The setting can be changed here. Reboot
Reboots this R&S®TCE900. Changes to settings in this and the other menu tabs of the Basic Config menu only become effective after a reboot.
Configuration
IP Address (Local IP Settings)
Used to set the IP address of the R&S®TCE900 for internal communication with other R&S®TCE900 units in this system. When the system is supplied, the internal IP addresses begin with 192.168.58. The last group of digits differs according to the following rule: System Control: 100 ● Tx Control + Exciter: 11/12 (= TxA1, Exciter A/B) to ● 81/82 (= TxA8, Exciter A/B); 91/92 (= TXB, Exciter A/ B) Rack Control (second rack): 101 ●
Configuration
The setting can be changed here.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
140
164/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
Operating the Device Manager
R&S THU9/TMU9
Basic Settings
Name
Description
Value range
IP Address (Remote IP
Used to set the IP address of the TCE900 system control. The settings depend on the network infrastructure.
Used to determine which module is contained in each installation slot of the R&S®TCE900 unit. Basically, any module can be inserted into any installation slot. The rack cabling has, however, been optimized for installation of the modules in the following slots: Slot A (bottom left): RF board or Tx interface ● Slot B (top center): Cooling interface (CIF or ACIF) or ● ATV interface Slot C (bottom center): Reserved for receiver module ● Slot CD (top right): Coder board or LAN switch ●
Coder Board, RFBoard, TxIf, CoolingIf, LANSwitchIf, ATVIf, CIF, ACIF
Access right
Settings) Slot Config
Configuration
The setting can be changed here.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
141
165/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
R&S THU9/TMU9
Operating the Device Manager Basic Settings
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
142
166/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
User Administration
R&S THU9/TMU9
Creating New User Profiles
7 User Administration ‑
The user administration facility is available in conjunction with browser based operation. The settings that you enter in user administration are also valid for opening menus in local operation. You can use the user administration facility to perform the following tasks. ●
create new user profiles
●
change user profiles (users and access rights)
●
delete user profiles
●
close active sessions
The "Superuser" ID with the factory ‑set password 1234 gives you extensive user administration rights.
7.1 Creating New User Profiles A new user profile is created in the following way: 1. Log on as Superuser via the web interface. User name: Superuser Password: 1234 The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed. 2. Select the option Add new user. 3. Enter a user name and password and the desired permissions for this user. The password must be at least 6 characters long. 4. Click "Add user" if the settings are correct. Click "Reset" if the settings are not correct, and enter the settings again.
7.2 Modifying User Profiles (Users and Access Rights) An existing user profile is modified in the following way: 1. Log on as Superuser via the web interface. User name: Superuser Password: 1234 The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed. 2. From the list of existing users, select the user to be modified from the Select column. 3. Select the option Change selected user 4. Change the user's profile according to your requirements. 5. Click "Change user" if the settings are correct.
Operating Manual 2109.9110.02 ─ 04
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
143
167/168
5/27/2018
Ope ra ting_Ma nua l_THU9-TMU9-2109.9110.02-04 - slide pdf.c om
User Administration
R&S THU9/TMU9
Deleting User Profiles
Click "Reset" if the settings are not correct, and enter the settings again. For the default users, you can change the passwords only; you cannot change access rights.
7.3 Deleting User Profiles A user profile is deleted in the following way: 1. Log on as Superuser via the web interface. User name: Superuser Password: 1234 The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed. 2. From the list of existing users, select the user to be deleted from the Select column. 3. Select the option Delete selected user. 4. The profile is removed from the user list.
7.4 Closing Active Sessions Information about existing sessions is obtained and active sessions are closed in the following way: 1. Log on as Superuser via the web interface. User name: Superuser Password: 1234 The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed. 2. Select the option Show session list. A list with information about the active sessions is displayed. 3. From the list of existing sessions, select the session to be closed from the Select column. 4. Select the option Delete selected session. The selected session is closed. 5. Select the option Show user list. The list of existing users is displayed again.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/ope ra tingma nua lthu9-tmu9-2109911002-04
168/168